Pioneer Flat Panel Television PRO 1140HD User Manual
PLASMA DISPLAY SYSTEM  
PRO-1140HD  
PRO-940HD  
RegisterYour Product on  
www.pioneerelectronics.com (US)  
www.pioneerelectronics.ca (Canada)  
Operating Instructions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WARNING:  
THE  
APPARATUS  
IS  
NOT  
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS  
COMMISSION DECLARATION OF  
CONFORMITY  
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)  
This device may not cause harmful interference, and  
(2) this device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation.  
Product Name: Plasma Display System  
Model Number: PRO-1140HD/PRO-940HD  
Product Category: Class B Personal Computers &  
Peripherals  
Responsible Party Name: PIONEER ELECTRONICS  
SERVICE, INC.  
Address: 1925 E. DOMINGUEZ ST. LONG BEACH, CA  
90801-1760, U.S.A.  
Phone: 800-421-1625  
For Business Customer URL  
http://www.PioneerUSA.com  
WATERPROOFS, TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK  
HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN  
OR MOISTURE AND DO NOT PUT ANY WATER  
SOURCE NEAR THIS APPARATUS, SUCH AS VASE,  
FLOWER POT, COSMETICS CONTAINER AND  
MEDICINE BOTTLE ETC.  
WARNING: Handling the cord on this product or  
cords associated with accessories sold with the  
product will expose you to lead, a chemical known to  
the State of California and other governmental entities  
to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive  
harm. Wash hands after handling.  
Information to User  
Alteration or modifications carried out without  
appropriate authorization may invalidate the user’s  
right to operate the equipment.  
[For Canadian model]  
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian  
ICES-003.  
NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant  
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful  
interference in a residential installation.  
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in  
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is  
no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful  
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the  
user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:  
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.  
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
D8-10-1-2_En  
CAUTION: This product satisfies FCC regulations when shielded cables and connectors are used to connect the  
unit to other equipment. To prevent electromagnetic interference with electric appliances such as radios and  
televisions, use shielded cables and connectors for connections.  
D8-10-3a_En  
IMPORTANT NOTICE – THE SERIAL NUMBER FOR THIS EQUIPMENT IS LOCATED IN THE REAR.  
PLEASE WRITE THIS SERIAL NUMBER ON YOUR ENCLOSED WARRANTY CARD AND  
KEEP IN A SECURE AREA. THIS IS FOR YOUR SECURITY.  
D1-4-2-6-1_En  
CAUTION: The power switch does not completely separate the unit from the mains in off position. Therefore  
install the unit suitable places easy to disconnect the mains plug in case of the accident. The mains plug of unit  
should be unplugged from the wall socket when left unused for a long period of time.  
STANDBY:  
When placed into the standby mode, the main power flow is cut and the unit is no longer  
fully operational.  
STANDBY/ON Indicator: The indicator is lit red when the unit is in the standby mode and lit blue when it is in the  
power-on mode. No operation can be performed when the indicator is off. However, the  
Plasma Display System will still consume some power as long as the power cord is  
inserted into the power outlet.  
CAUTION:  
Operating Environment  
Operating environment temperature and humidity:  
+0 ˚C to +40 ˚C (+32 ˚F to +104 ˚F), less than 85 %RH (cooling vents not blocked) Do not install this unit in a  
poorly ventilated area, or in locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or strong artificial light)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Contents  
Thank you for buying this Pioneer product.  
Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly. After you have finished  
reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference.  
In some countries or regions, the shape of the power plug and power outlet may sometimes differ from that shown in the  
explanatory drawings. However the method of connecting and operating the unit is the same.  
Illustrations shown in this manual are for the PRO-1140HD unless otherwise specified.  
01 Important User Guidance Information  
02 Safety Precautions  
Using the POD service ......................... 28  
Using the multiscreen functions ............. 28  
Splitting the screen .............................. 28  
Freezing images .................................... 29  
03 Supplied Accessories  
07 TV Guide On Screen™ System Setup  
About the TV Guide On Screen™  
04 Part Names  
Plasma Display ...........................................13  
Remote control unit ...................................17  
system ........................................................ 30  
Setting up the TV Guide On Screen™  
system ........................................................ 30  
05 Preparation  
Installing the Plasma Display ...................18  
Moving the Plasma Display .......................18  
Preventing the Plasma Display from Falling  
Over .............................................................19  
Attaching/detaching the PIONEER stand  
(for PRO-940HD only) ................................20  
Cable connections for watching digital  
and/or conventional TV channels .............21  
Connecting VHF/UHF antennas and a  
Cable .......................................................21  
Inserting the CableCARD™ .......................21  
Switching between antenna A and B .......21  
Preparing the remote control unit ............22  
Inserting batteries .................................22  
Cautions regarding batteries ................22  
Allowed operation range of the remote  
control unit .............................................22  
Cautions regarding the remote control  
unit ..........................................................22  
Connecting the power cord .......................23  
Routing cables ...........................................23  
08 Menu Setup  
Menu Configuration .................................. 34  
AV mode menus ................................... 34  
PC mode menus ................................... 34  
Menu operations ................................... 34  
09 Tuner Setup  
Setting up TV channels ............................. 35  
Using Auto Channel Preset ................. 35  
Setting for skipping unwanted  
channels ................................................ 35  
Setting up TV channels manually ....... 35  
Checking signal strength ..................... 35  
Checking the CableCARD ID ............... 36  
Parental Control ........................................ 36  
Changing the password ....................... 36  
Clearing the password ......................... 37  
Activating the Parental Control ........... 37  
Setting the voluntary movie rating  
system (MPAA) ..................................... 37  
Setting the TV ratings ........................... 37  
Setting the TV Parental Guidelines  
06 Basic Operations  
(TV Guidelines) ...................................... 38  
Blocking Not Rated TV programs ........ 38  
Canadian rating systems ..................... 38  
Setting Canadian English ratings ....... 39  
Setting Canadian French ratings ........ 39  
Setting new ratings .............................. 39  
Deleting new ratings ............................ 40  
Temporarily deactivating the Parental  
Control ................................................... 40  
Setting your favorite channels ................. 41  
Turning on the power .................................24  
Turning off the power .................................24  
Watching TV channels ...............................25  
Selecting the antenna ...........................25  
Changing channels ...............................25  
Changing the volume and sound .........26  
Changing the language ........................26  
Setting MTS/SAP mode ........................27  
Viewing a channel banner ....................28  
4
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Setting up closed captions ....................... 41  
Activating the closed caption .............. 41  
Selecting the type of conventional  
Power Control ............................................ 61  
Energy Save ........................................... 61  
No Signal off (AV mode only) ............... 61  
No Operation off (AV mode only) ......... 62  
Power Management  
(PC mode only) ...................................... 62  
Image position adjustment  
(AV mode only) .......................................... 62  
Automatic image position and clock  
(Hertz) adjustments (PC mode only) ....... 62  
Manual image position and clock  
closed captions ..................................... 41  
Selecting digital closed captions ........ 42  
Selecting digital closed caption  
parameters ............................................ 42  
Clock Setting ............................................. 42  
10 TV Guide On Screen™ System Operation  
Using the TV Guide On Screen™  
system ........................................................ 44  
Screen components .................................. 44  
TV Guide On Screen™ icons ................ 44  
TV Guide On Screen™ navigation ....... 45  
The Listings screen ................................... 45  
Recording programs ................................. 46  
Setting program reminders ...................... 47  
Searching for programs ........................... 49  
Searching by category .......................... 49  
Searching by keyword .......................... 50  
Alphabetical search ............................. 51  
The search Episode Options menu ..... 51  
Scheduling recordings and reminders ... 52  
The Schedule Options menu ............... 52  
Changing setup options ........................... 53  
Changing the System Settings ............ 53  
Changing the Channel Display  
adjustments (PC mode only) .................... 63  
Selecting a screen size manually ............. 63  
Selecting a screen size automatically ..... 64  
Selecting a screen size for 4:3 aspect  
ratio signals ........................................... 64  
Changing the brightness on both sides of  
the screen (Side Mask) ............................. 65  
Language setting ....................................... 65  
12 Using External Equipment  
About External Equipment ....................... 66  
Watching a DVD image ............................ 66  
Connecting a DVD player ..................... 66  
Displaying a DVD image ...................... 66  
Watching a VCR image ............................. 66  
Connecting a VCR ................................. 66  
Displaying a VCR image ....................... 66  
Using HDMI Input ..................................... 67  
Connecting HDMI equipment ............. 67  
Using a game console or watching  
camcorder images .................................... 68  
Connecting a game console or  
camcorder ............................................. 68  
Displaying an image of the game  
console or camcorder .......................... 68  
Recording digital TV programs using  
a VCR .......................................................... 68  
Avoiding unwanted feedback .............. 68  
Connecting a recorder ......................... 69  
Connecting other audio equipment ......... 69  
Connecting an AV receiver .................. 69  
Watching an image from a computer ..... 70  
Connecting a personal computer ........ 70  
Displaying an image from a PC ........... 70  
Computer compatibility chart .................. 71  
G-LINK™ connection ................................. 71  
Connecting control cables ....................... 72  
About SR+ ............................................ 72  
settings .................................................. 53  
Changing the Default Options ............. 54  
11 Adjustments and Settings  
Sleep Timer ................................................ 55  
AV Selection .............................................. 55  
Basic picture adjustments ....................... 56  
Advanced picture adjustments ................ 57  
Using PureCinema ............................... 57  
Using Color Temp ................................. 57  
Using CTI ............................................... 58  
Using Color Management .................... 58  
Using Color Space ................................ 58  
Using Intelligent Color ......................... 58  
Eliminating noise from images ........... 59  
Using the Dynamic Range Expander  
(DRE) functions .................................... 59  
Using the 3DYC and I-P Mode ............. 60  
Sound adjustments ................................... 60  
FOCUS ................................................... 61  
Front Surround ..................................... 61  
5
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Enjoying the Home Media Gallery ............73  
Making network connections ...............74  
Connecting a USB device .....................74  
Starting the Home Media Gallery  
function ..................................................75  
Enjoying movie files ..............................77  
Enjoying music files ..............................80  
Enjoying photo files ...............................81  
Other useful functions ..........................84  
Glossary ..................................................89  
13 Useful Remote Control Features  
Learning function of the remote  
control unit .................................................90  
Using the learning function .................90  
Presetting manufacturer codes to  
control other devices .................................90  
Presetting manufacturer codes ...........90  
Library Search ........................................90  
Delete Learning .....................................90  
Manufacturing Reset ............................91  
Programming codes ............................92  
CABLE ....................................................92  
SATELLITE ..............................................92  
VCR .........................................................93  
PVR .........................................................95  
DVD .........................................................95  
DVD-R .....................................................96  
LD ............................................................96  
Using the remote control unit to control  
other devices ..............................................97  
Receiver control buttons .......................97  
CBL/SAT control buttons ......................98  
VCR control buttons ..............................99  
DVD/DVR control buttons ...................100  
14 Appendix  
Troubleshooting .......................................101  
Specifications ...........................................115  
6
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Important User Guidance Information  
Important User Guidance Information  
01  
In order to obtain maximum enjoyment from this Pioneer  
PureVision PRO-1140HD/PRO-940HD Plasma Display Panel,  
please first read this information carefully.  
With the Pioneer PureVision PRO-1140HD/PRO-940HD, you  
can be assured of a high quality Plasma Display Panel with  
long-life and high reliability. To achieve images of exceptional  
quality, this Pioneer Plasma Display Panel incorporates state-  
of-the-art design and construction as well as precise and highly  
advanced technology.  
Installation guidelines  
The Pioneer PureVision PRO-1140HD/PRO-940HD Plasma  
Display Panel incorporates a very thin design. To ensure safety,  
please take the proper measures when mounting or installing  
the Plasma Display. Prevent the unit from tipping over during  
vibration or accidental movement.  
This product should be installed by using only parts and  
accessories designed by PIONEER. Use of installation or  
mounting accessories other than PIONEER-approved stands  
or brackets may result in instability and could cause injury. For  
custom installation, please consult the dealer where the unit  
was purchased. To ensure correct installation, experienced  
and qualified experts must install the unit. PIONEER is not  
responsible for accident or damage caused by the use of parts  
and/or accessories manufactured by other unauthorized  
companies.  
To avoid malfunction and overheating when installing, make  
sure that the vents on the main unit are not blocked. To ensure  
proper venting:  
• Distance the unit slightly from other equipment, walls, etc.  
For the minimum space required around the unit, see page  
18.  
The Pioneer PureVision PRO-1140HD/PRO-940HD  
incorporates the latest in color filter technology – Direct Color  
Filter. This filter technology improves color reproduction over  
previous models. It also eliminates the need for a glass panel  
to be layered in front of the plasma panel. This feature which  
furthers Pioneer’s goal of reducing environmental waste in  
consumer electronics, during the manufacturing process and  
in the future during the recycling process.  
Over the course of its lifetime, the luminosity of the Pioneer  
PRO-1140HD/PRO-940HD Plasma Display System will  
diminish very slowly, which happens to all phosphor-based  
screens (for example, a traditional tube-type television). To  
enjoy beautiful and bright images on your Pioneer Plasma  
Display Panel for many years to come, please carefully read  
and follow the usage guidelines below.  
• Do not place the unit inside a narrow place where ventilation  
is poor.  
• Do not cover with a cloth, etc.  
Usage guidelines  
• Clean the vents on the sides and rear of the unit to remove  
dust build-up. Use a vacuum cleaner set to its lowest suction  
setting to clear dust.  
• Do not place the product on a carpet or blanket.  
• Do not leave the product tilted at an angle without proper  
anchoring.  
All phosphor-based screens (including conventional tube-type  
televisions) can be affected by static images appearing for a  
prolonged period. Plasma displays are no exception to this  
rule. After-image and permanent effects on the screen can be  
avoided by taking some basic precautions.  
• Whenever possible, avoid showing the same image or low-  
motion pictures (e.g. closed-captioned images or video  
game images which have static portions).  
• Avoid viewing the On Screen Display (OSD) for extended  
periods (from a DVD player, VCR, and all other components).  
• Do not leave the same picture, freeze-framed or paused  
continuously, shown over a long period of time when using  
the still picture mode from a TV, VCR, DVD player or any  
other component.  
• Images which have both very bright areas and very dark  
areas side by side should not be displayed for a prolonged  
period of time.  
• Do not invert the product.  
Using the unit without proper ventilation may cause the  
internal temperature to rise, and could result in possible  
malfunction. When the surrounding or internal temperature  
exceeds a certain degree, the display automatically powers  
OFF in order to cool the internal electronics.  
Malfunction can be caused by many factors: inappropriate  
installation site, improper assembly/installation/mounting,  
improper operation of or modifications made to this product,  
etc. PIONEER is not responsible for accidents or malfunction  
caused by the above situations.  
• When playing a video game, the “GAME” mode setting within  
“AV Selection” is strongly recommended. However, please  
do not use this mode for long periods of time.  
• After playing a game, displaying a PC image, or any still  
image, it is best to view a normal moving picture in the  
“WIDE” or “FULL” screen setting for over 3 times longer than  
the previous still/moving image was shown.  
• After using the Plasma Display System, always switch the  
display to Standby.  
• Extensive viewing of content with top, bottom, or side masks  
may cause uneven wear. After viewing masked content, view  
full screen motion video for an equal or greater amount of  
time.  
NOTE  
The following points are typical effects and characteristics of a  
phosphor-based matrix display and as such, are not covered by  
the manufacturer’s limited warranties:  
• Permanent residual images upon the panel’s phosphors.  
• Existence of a small number of inactive light cells.  
• Panel generated sounds (Fan motor noise, electrical circuit  
humming, glass panel buzzing, etc.)  
7
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Important User Guidance Information  
01  
When not using the product for a long time  
• If you do not use the product for a long time, the functions of  
the product may be adversely affected. Switch ON and run  
the product occasionally to maintain quality.  
CAUTION  
PIONEER bears no responsibility for any damage arising from  
incorrect use of the product malfunctions when in use, other  
product related problems, and use of the product except in  
cases where the company must be liable.  
Condensation  
• Condensation may take place on the surface or inside of the  
panel when the unit is rapidly moved from a cold place to a  
warm place or when a heater is turned On in the room. When  
condensation occurs, do not switch On the panel until  
condensation disappears. Operating the panel when there is  
condensation can damage the unit.  
Plasma Display protection function  
When still images (such as photos and computer images) stay  
on the screen for an extended period of time, the screen  
slightly dims. This function automatically adjusts the  
brightness to protect the screen when a still image is detected.  
The screen is dimmed for approximately three minutes.  
Cleaning the surface of the screen and the glossy  
surface of the front cabinet  
• When cleaning the surface of the screen or the glossy  
surface of the front cabinet, gently wipe with the supplied  
cleaning cloth or a similar cloth (e.g., cotton, flannel, etc.).  
Using a dirty or course material cloth can scratch and  
damage the panel’s surfaces.  
• If you clean the surface of the screen with a wet cloth, water  
droplets may enter into the product, resulting in a  
malfunction.  
Information of pixel defect  
Plasma screens display information using pixels. Pioneer  
plasma display panels contain a very large number of pixels. (A  
42" panel has over 2.3 million pixels and a 50" panel has over 3.1  
million pixels). All Pioneer plasma panels are manufactured  
using a very high level of ultra-precision technology and  
undergo individual quality control.  
In rare cases, one or more pixels may remain switched Off or  
On. A pixel that remains Off appears as a tiny black dot on the  
screen while an active pixel appears as a dot of a particular  
color.  
This effect is common to all plasma displays because it is a  
consequence of the technology.  
If the defective pixels are visible at a normal viewing distance of  
between 2.5 and 3.5 meters (8.2 and 11.5 feet) while viewing a  
normal broadcast (i.e. not a test card, still image, or single color  
display) please contact Pioneer Customer Support Div. (USA) or  
Customer Satisfaction Dept. (CANADA). See back cover for  
contact information.  
If, however, the fixed pixel(s) can only be seen from a distance  
of less than 8 feet or during single color displays then the  
appearance is considered normal for plasma technology.  
Cleaning the cabinet  
• When cleaning other panel surfaces, gently wipe with a  
clean soft cloth (e.g., cotton, flannel, etc.). Using a dirty or  
course material cloth can scratch and damage the panel’s  
surfaces.  
• The cabinet of this product is mostly composed of plastic. Do  
not use chemicals such as benzene or thinner to clean the  
cabinet. Using these chemicals can strip the surface coating  
or cause cabinet deterioration.  
• Do not expose the product to a volatile gas or fluid such as  
pesticide. Do not apply rubber or vinyl products to the  
cabinet for long periods of time. The effect of plasticizer on  
the cabinet can strip the surface coating or cause  
deterioration.  
Infrared rays  
The Plasma Display releases infrared rays because of the panel  
characteristics. Surrounding equipment with remote controls  
and wireless headphones using infrared signals can  
experience interference. Move any affected equipment to a  
location away from the plasma panel.  
• If you clean the surface of the cabinet with a wet cloth, water  
droplets may enter into the product, resulting in a  
malfunction.  
Handles at the rear of the Plasma Display  
• Do not remove the handles from the rear of the Plasma  
Display.  
• When moving the Plasma Display, ask another person for  
help and use the handles attached to the rear of the Plasma  
Display. Do not move the Plasma Display by holding only a  
single handle. Use the handles as shown on page 18.  
Radio interference  
While this product meets required specifications, the panel  
emits a small amount of electronic noise. This noise can affect  
radio, computer, and VCR reception. Move devices away from  
the panel to reduce or eliminate interference.  
• Do not use the handles to hang, suspend, or anchor the  
panel.  
Plasma Display driving sound  
The screen of the Plasma Display is composed of extremely  
fine pixels and these pixels emit light according to received  
video signals. This principle may cause you to hear a buzz or  
electrical hum coming from the Plasma Display.  
Fan motor noise  
The rotation speed of the cooling fan motor increases when the  
ambient temperature of the Plasma Display becomes high.  
You may hear the sound of the fan motor at that time.  
Do not attach such items as labels and tape to the  
product.  
• Labels and tape can mar or discolor the cabinet.  
8
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Important User Guidance Information  
01  
About the menu window size following video  
format switch  
CAUTION  
Panel sticking and after-image lag  
The video program that you watch may be high definition (HD)  
or standard definition (SD). This Plasma Display is designed to  
scale to either HD or SD signals. If the video program’s  
definition type changes while a menu window is displayed on  
the screen (for example: HD → SD or SD → HD), the menu size  
may temporarily shrink or enlarge until the scaling is complete.  
For example, switching between a TV program and an external  
digital video recorder (D-VHS) while viewing a menu can cause  
the menu window size to fluctuate.  
• Displaying the same images such as still images for a long  
time may cause after-image lagging. This may occur in the  
following two cases.  
1
After-image lagging due to remaining electric load  
When image patterns with very high peak luminance are  
displayed for more than one(1) minute, after-image lagging  
may occur due to the remaining electrical load. The after-  
images remaining on the screen disappears when moving  
images are shown. The time for the after-images to disappear  
depends on the luminance of the still image and the length of  
time displayed.  
If this happens, the menu will return to its normal size after two  
to three seconds. This action is normal, and does not indicate  
a problem with your Plasma Display Panel.  
2
After-image (lag image) due to burning  
Avoid displaying the same image on the Plasma Display  
continuously over a long period of time. If the same image is  
displayed continuously for several hours, or for shorter periods  
but over several days, a permanent after-image may remain on  
the screen due to burning of the fluorescent materials. Such  
images may become less noticeable if moving images are later  
displayed but they do not disappear completely.  
Image Retention  
When a static image is shown on a display for several hours, a  
faint imprint of the image, known as image retention, can  
remain. This image retention may be temporary or permanent.  
Although caused by different things, image retention can  
occur on all display technologies, including plasma and LCD.  
On today’s plasma displays, permanent image retention is less  
of a worry. Most image retention can be improved simply by  
watching a motion video sequence.  
NOTE  
• When a program menu, TV Guide screen or frozen image is  
displayed for 5 to 10 minutes, the system automatically turns  
the screen off to prevent damage from screen burning.  
• To prevent screen burning, the display position is  
automatically changed slightly when the power is switched  
on or the input changed. Depending on the broadcast  
content, some parts of the picture may not be visible.  
Image retention, also known as burn-in, can occur in all  
phosphor-based display systems (including CRT television  
systems–both direct view and projection–as well as plasma  
display systems). To avoid image retention or burn-in, do not  
show a still image for an extended period. Recommended  
guidelines are as follows:  
• Do not display static images such as still images, fixed  
images from PC or TV game equipment, and/or fixed images  
such as time of day indicator or channel logo display for long  
periods.  
• Do not display content in the 4:3 aspect ratio (black or gray  
bars on left and right side of content) or letter-box content  
(black bars above and below content) for extended periods of  
time, or use either of these viewing modes repeatedly within  
a short period of time. This plasma display system is  
equipped with multiple wide-screen viewing modes; use one  
of these screen modes to fill the entire screen with content.  
• Displaying dark images after showing a still image for an  
extended time may cause image retention. In most cases,  
the image retention can be corrected by displaying bright  
images for a similar period of time.  
Preventing damage from screen burning  
• Please show images in full screen unless doing so causes  
copyright infringement. See page 63.  
• The Energy save function can be set to help prevent screen  
burn-in. See page 61.  
CAUTION  
DO NOT PLACE THIS PRODUCT ON AN UNSTABLE CART,  
STAND, TRIPOD, BRACKET, OR TABLE. THE PRODUCT MAY  
FALL, CAUSING SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND SERIOUS  
DAMAGE TO THE PRODUCT. USE ONLY WITH A CART,  
STAND, TRIPOD, BRACKET, OR TABLE RECOMMENDED BY  
THE MANUFACTURER, OR SOLD WITH THE PRODUCT.  
FOLLOW THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS WHEN  
INSTALLING THE PRODUCT. ONLY USE MOUNTING  
Warning: Displaying a still image on the panel for a long period  
of time can cause the image to be burned in to the screen  
permanently.  
ACCESSORIES RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER.  
A PRODUCT AND CART COMBINATION SHOULD BE MOVED  
WITH CARE. QUICK STOPS, EXCESSIVE FORCE, AND  
UNEVEN SURFACES MAY CAUSE THE COMBINED UNIT TO  
OVERTURN.  
9
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Precautions  
Safety Precautions  
02  
This product has been engineered and manufactured with the  
highest priority on safety. However, improper use can result in  
electric shock and/or fire. To prevent injury, please observe the  
following instructions when installing, operating and cleaning  
the product. To ensure your safety and prolong the service life  
of your product, please read the following precautions carefully  
before using the product.  
• Do not attempt to service the product yourself. Removing  
covers can expose you to high voltage and other dangerous  
conditions. Request service from qualified and authorized  
service personnel.  
• If any of the following conditions occurs, unplug the power  
cord from the AC outlet and arrange for repairs with qualified  
service personnel.  
• Read all operating instructions before operating the panel.  
• Keep this manual safe for future reference.  
• Observe all warnings on the product and in the operating  
instructions.  
• power cord or plug is damaged  
• liquid spilled or objects fallen into unit  
• exposed to rain or water  
• product fails to perform as described in the operating  
instructions  
• Follow all operating instructions.  
• Cleaning—Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet  
before cleaning the product. To clean the product, use the  
supplied cleaning cloth or other soft cloth (e.g., cotton,  
flannel, etc.). Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners.  
Do not touch the controls other than those described in  
the operating instructions. Improper adjustments can  
cause damage, which often requires correction by a  
qualified technician  
• Do not use attachments unless recommended by the  
manufacturer. Use of unauthorized attachments can result  
in accidents.  
• Do not use the product near water (bathtub, washbasin,  
kitchen sink, laundry area, swimming pool, in a wet or damp  
basement, etc.).  
• unit dropped or damaged  
• abnormal appearance of picture  
• Replacement parts must meet or exceed specifications set  
by the manufacturer. Use of unauthorized parts can result in  
fire, electric shock and/or other danger.  
• Upon completion of service or repair work, request that the  
service technician perform periodic safety checks to ensure  
that the product is in proper operating condition.  
• When mounting the product on a wall or ceiling, install the  
panel according to the method recommended by the  
manufacturer.  
• Keep the product away from heat sources such as radiators,  
heaters, stoves and other heat-generating devices (including  
amplifiers).  
• Do not place the product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod  
or table. Placing the product on an unstable base can cause  
the product to fall, resulting in serious personal injuries as  
well as damage to the panel. Use only a cart, stand, tripod,  
bracket or table recommended by the manufacturer or sold  
with the unit. When mounting the product on a wall, follow  
the manufacturer’s instructions precisely. Use only  
mounting hardware recommended by the manufacturer.  
• Sudden stops, excessive pushing and uneven floors can  
cause a unit mounted on a cart to fall. Move the cart with  
caution.  
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before installing  
the speakers.  
• Never expose the screen of the Plasma Display Panel to a  
strong impact. The screen may be broken, resulting in fire or  
personal injury.  
• Do not expose the Plasma Display Panel to direct sunlight  
for a long period of time. The optical characteristics of the  
front protection panel changes, resulting in discoloration or  
warping.  
• The approximate weight of each Plasma Display Panel is as  
follows:  
- PRO-1140HD - 34.3 kg (75.7 lbs.)  
- PRO-940HD - 31.7 kg (69.9 lbs.)  
(with stand)  
Unpacking, carrying, and installing requires two or more  
people.  
• Openings in the cabinet are designed for ventilation. Do not  
cover or block these vents and openings since insufficient  
ventilation can cause overheating and/or shorten the life of  
the panel. Do not place the product on a bed, sofa, rug or  
other similar surface since material can block the vents. This  
product is not designed for built-in installations. Do not  
place the product in an enclosed place such as a bookcase  
or rack unless properly vented.  
• This product must operate on a power source as stated on  
the specification label. If you are not sure of the type of power  
supply used in your home, consult your dealer or local power  
company.  
• Power cord protection—The power cords must be routed  
properly to prevent being stepped on or being pinched  
between objects. Check entire length of all cables to guard  
against pinching.  
• This panel contains glass elements. Sudden impacts from  
dropping or hitting the panel can break the glass. If the panel  
is broken, avoid contact with the glass shards.  
• Do not overload AC outlets or extension cords. Overloading  
can cause fire or electric shock.  
• Never insert objects through vents or openings. High voltage  
flows in the product, inserting an object can cause electrical  
shock and/or short internal parts. For the same reason, do  
not spill water or liquids into the products.  
10  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Precautions  
02  
Installation Precautions  
Observe the following precautions when installing the panel using optional mounting methods such as the bracket.  
When using the optional brackets or equivalent items  
• Ask your dealer to perform the installation.  
• Use only the supplied bolts.  
• For details, see the instruction manual that comes with the optional bracket (or equivalent mounting item).  
When using other items  
• Consult your dealer.  
• The following six mounting holes can be used for the installation:  
Rear view (PRO-1140HD)  
Side view  
Mounting surface  
Mounting  
bracket (or  
equivalent item)  
Mounting  
hole  
Mounting  
hole  
Plasma  
Display  
Median line  
M8 screw  
12 mm to 18 mm  
(0.5 inches to 0.7 inches)  
Median line  
Rear view (PRO-940HD)  
Mounting  
hole  
Mounting  
hole  
Median line  
Median line  
CAUTION  
• Use at least four mounting holes symmetrical to the vertical and horizontal median lines.  
• Use M8 screws, which go 12 mm to 18 mm (0.5 inches to 0.7 inches) in depth from the mounting surface of the Plasma Display.  
See the side view above.  
• Be careful not to block rear vents on the Plasma Display.  
• Install the Plasma Display on a flat surface to avoid warping the glass.  
• The diagrams above show the location of standard mounting screw holes. Holes other than those shown above are for specific  
mounting methods and should not be used unless a mounting option’s instructions require their use.  
NOTE  
• Use the optional PIONEER mounting products whenever possible.  
• PIONEER shall not be liable for any personal injury or property damage that results from using mounting items other than the  
optional PIONEER products.  
11  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Supplied Accessories  
Supplied Accessories  
03  
Power cord (2 m/6.6 feet)  
Cleaning cloth  
Operating instructions  
Speed clamp  
×
3
Bead band  
×
3
Warranty card  
G-LINK cable (3 m/9.8 feet)  
Ferrite core  
AA size battery x 2  
(Alkaline battery for  
remote control unit)  
Hexagonal wrench x 1  
(Diagonal size: 6 mm)  
(for PRO-940HD only)  
Remote control unit  
12  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Part Names  
Part Names  
04  
Plasma Display  
Front/side view  
(PRO-1140HD)  
11  
12  
6
7
8
9
13  
14  
10  
2
3
1
4
5
(Side view)  
1 a POWER button  
6 STANDBY/ON button  
7 INPUT button (ENTER button*)  
(See page 24)  
2
3
POWER ON indicator  
(See page 24)  
STANDBY indicator  
(See page 24)  
8 VOLUME UP/DOWN buttons (UP/DOWN  
buttons*)  
9 CHANNEL UP/DOWN buttons (LEFT/  
RIGHT buttons*)  
4
5
REC TIMER indicator  
Remote control sensor  
10 TV GUIDE button*  
11 USB port  
12 INPUT 4 terminals (COMPONENT VIDEO: Y,  
C
B/PB, CR/PR)  
13 INPUT 4 terminal (VIDEO)  
14 INPUT 4 terminals (AUDIO)  
* ability to operate the TV Guide On Screen™ system.  
13  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Part Names  
04  
Front/side view  
(PRO-940HD)  
11  
12  
6
7
8
9
13  
14  
10  
2
3
4
1
5
Viewed from below of the display  
Viewed from the front side of the display  
(Side view)  
1 a POWER button  
(See page 24)  
6 STANDBY/ON button  
2
3
POWER ON indicator  
(See page 24)  
STANDBY indicator  
(See page 24)  
7 INPUT button (ENTER button*)  
8 VOLUME UP/DOWN buttons (UP/DOWN  
buttons*)  
9 CHANNEL UP/DOWN buttons (LEFT/  
4
5
REC TIMER indicator  
Remote control sensor  
RIGHT buttons*)  
10 TV GUIDE button*  
11 USB port  
12 INPUT 4 terminals (COMPONENT VIDEO: Y,  
C
B/PB, CR/PR)  
13 INPUT 4 terminal (VIDEO)  
14 INPUT 4 terminals (AUDIO)  
* ability to operate the TV Guide On Screen™ system.  
14  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Part Names  
04  
Rear view  
(PRO-1140HD)  
17 18  
22  
21  
23  
1
7
2
5
3
4
11  
12  
13  
25  
10  
6
8 9  
14  
15  
16  
(Terminals located on the upper  
edge of the compartment)  
26  
27  
28  
19 2024  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PC INPUT terminal (ANALOG RGB)  
CableCARD™ slot  
ANT/CABLE A IN terminal  
ANT B IN terminal  
AC IN terminal  
15 INPUT 3 terminals (COMPONENT VIDEO: Y,  
C
B/PB, CR/PR)  
16 INPUT 2 terminals (COMPONENT VIDEO: Y,  
C
B/PB, CR/PR)  
17 INPUT 2 terminal (VIDEO)  
18 INPUT 2 terminal (S-VIDEO)  
19 INPUT 2 terminals (AUDIO)  
20 INPUT 1 terminals (AUDIO)  
21 INPUT 1 terminal (S-VIDEO)  
22 INPUT 1 terminal (VIDEO)  
23 MONITOR OUT terminal (VIDEO)  
24 MONITOR OUT terminals (AUDIO)  
25 PC INPUT terminal (AUDIO)  
26 CONTROL OUT terminal  
Ethernet cable port  
HDMI terminals (INPUT 5/INPUT 6)  
RS-232C terminal (used for factory setup)  
DIGITAL OUT terminal (OPTICAL)  
10 G-LINK terminal  
11 INPUT 5 terminals (AUDIO)  
12 INPUT 6 terminals (AUDIO)  
13 SUB WOOFER terminal  
14 INPUT 3 terminals (AUDIO)  
27 CONTROL IN terminal  
28 SPEAKER (R/L) terminals  
15  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Part Names  
04  
Rear view  
(PRO-940HD)  
17 18  
22  
21  
23  
1
7
2
5
3
4
11  
12  
13  
10  
6
8
9
25  
14  
15  
16  
26  
27  
(Terminals located on the upper  
edge of the compartment)  
19 2024  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PC INPUT terminal (ANALOG RGB)  
CableCARD™ slot  
ANT/CABLE A IN terminal  
ANT B IN terminal  
AC IN terminal  
Ethernet cable port  
HDMI terminals (INPUT 5/INPUT 6)  
RS-232C terminal (used for factory setup)  
DIGITAL OUT terminal (OPTICAL)  
15 INPUT 3 terminals (COMPONENT VIDEO: Y,  
C
B/PB, CR/PR)  
16 INPUT 2 terminals (COMPONENT VIDEO: Y,  
C
B/PB, CR/PR)  
17 INPUT 2 terminal (VIDEO)  
18 INPUT 2 terminal (S-VIDEO)  
19 INPUT 2 terminals (AUDIO)  
20 INPUT 1 terminals (AUDIO)  
21 INPUT 1 terminal (S-VIDEO)  
22 INPUT 1 terminal (VIDEO)  
23 MONITOR OUT terminal (VIDEO)  
24 MONITOR OUT terminals (AUDIO)  
25 PC INPUT terminal (AUDIO)  
26 CONTROL OUT terminal  
10 G-LINK terminal  
11 INPUT 5 terminals (AUDIO)  
12 INPUT 6 terminals (AUDIO)  
13 SUB WOOFER terminal  
14 INPUT 3 terminals (AUDIO)  
27 CONTROL IN terminal  
16  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Part Names  
04  
9
/
/
/
: Selects a desired item on the menu  
Remote control unit  
screen  
This section describes the button functions when the mode is  
set to TV. To use the remote for controlling other equipment,  
see “Using the remote control unit to control other devices”  
starting on page 97.  
10 REC: When using the TV Guide On Screen™ System,  
triggers recording to a connected VCR  
11 FAVORITE CH (A, B, C, D)  
:
Selects any of the four preset channels (see page 41  
for details to set the FAVORITE CH)  
While watching, toggle the set channels by  
pressing A, B, C and D  
1
2
18  
.
12 0 – 9: Selects the channel  
13 •(dot): Enters a dot  
When entering the number of a sub-channel.  
14 CH +/–: Selects the channel.  
15 SPLIT: Switches the screen mode: 2-screen, picture-  
in-picture, single-screen  
3
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
4
5
6
7
16 FREEZE: Freezes a frame from a moving image.  
Press again to cancel the function.  
17 MTS: Selects MTS/SAP or language depending on  
the program being watched  
18 D: Lights up all buttons  
8
24  
9
25  
26  
10  
11  
12  
Lights turn off if no operations are performed within  
5 seconds. This is used for remote control use in  
dark locations.  
19 ANT: Selects the antenna (A, B) (see page 21 for  
details)  
20 AV SELECTION: Selects audio and video settings.  
(AV mode: STANDARD, DYNAMIC, MOVIE, GAME,  
PURE, USER. PC mode: STANDARD, USER)  
21 DISPLAY: Displays the channel information  
22 TV GUIDE: Displays the TV Guide On Screen™  
system  
13  
14  
27  
28  
29  
30  
23 ENTER: Executes a command  
24 PAGE +/– (for the TV Guide On Screen™ system):  
Scrolls the program listing screen vertically.  
25 RETURN: Returns to the previous menu screen  
26 MENU: Displays a panel menu in the TV Guide On  
Screen™ system  
31  
32  
15  
16  
17  
27 CH ENTER: Executes a channel number  
28 CH RETURN: Returns to the previous channel  
This button is disabled while the TV Guide On  
Screen™ system is displayed.  
Mode switch  
(with “TV” selected)  
29 VOL +/–: Sets the volume  
1
TV a: Turns ON the Plasma Display Panel or  
30 M MUTING: Mutes the sound  
31 SHIFT: Moves the small screen to a different location  
when in the picture-in-picture mode  
32 SWAP: Switches between the two screens when in  
the 2-screen or picture-in-picture mode  
places it in Standby.  
2
3
Transmission confirmation LED  
INPUT: Selects an input source for the Plasma  
Display Panel. (INPUT 1, INPUT 2, INPUT 3, INPUT 4,  
INPUT 5, INPUT 6 and PC)  
4
5
6
SCREEN SIZE: Selects the screen size.  
SLEEP: Sets the sleep timer.  
INFO: Displays a channel banner when a TV  
program is being watched.  
NOTE  
• When using the remote control, aim it at the Plasma Display.  
• See pages 90 to 100 for buttons not listed on this page.  
(When the TV Guide On Screen™ system is in  
operation, information about the currently  
highlighted channel appears on screen (when  
available).)  
HOME MENU: Displays the Home Menu screen  
DAY +/–: Jumps to the next or previous day of  
program listings in the TV Guide On Screen™ Listing  
service.  
7
8
17  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparation  
Preparation  
05  
Installing the Plasma Display  
Moving the Plasma Display  
CAUTION  
These Plasma Display Panels are thin and can be unstable  
when held upright. Therefore, at least two people must move  
and install these panels.  
(PRO-1140HD)  
Over 50 cm  
(19 11/16 inches)  
Over  
10 cm  
(315/16  
inches)  
Location  
• Avoid direct sunlight.  
• Maintain adequate ventilation.  
• Because the Plasma Display is heavy, have someone help  
you when moving or installing the panel.  
NOTE  
• Do not hold by the speaker.  
• Install the panel on a flat, stable location to avoid warping the  
glass components.  
NOTE  
• Allow enough space around the installed Plasma Display  
Panel to ensure proper ventilation.  
(PRO-940HD)  
CAUTION  
When installing on a rack, etc., someone must steady the  
panel at all times.  
18  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparation  
05  
Using a wall for stabilization  
Preventing the Plasma Display from  
Falling Over  
During installation, someone must steady the panel at all  
times.  
1. Attach fall-prevention bolts (hooks) to the  
Plasma Display.  
2. Use strong cords to firmly attach the panel  
to a wall, pillar, or other sturdy  
construction.  
Stabilizing on a table or floor  
Stabilize the Plasma Display as shown in the diagram using  
screws that are 6 mm (1/4 inch) and at least 20 mm (13/16 inch)  
long (available from your dealer or other hardware sources).  
3. Repeat attachment for the other side of the  
panel.  
NOTE  
Use hooks, cords, and fittings that are available from your  
dealer or other hardware sources.  
Recommended hook: Nominal diameter 8 mm (3/8 inch)  
Length 12 mm to 15 mm (1/2 inch to 5/8 inch)  
20 mm min.  
(13/16 inch min.)  
12 mm to 15 mm  
(1/2 inch to 5/8 inch)  
➀
Hook  
➁
Cord  
Fitting  
CAUTION  
The installation site should have adequate strength to support  
the Plasma Display. A weak installation site could result in  
personal injury and property damage. Please take the  
necessary safety measures to prevent it from falling during  
emergencies, such as earthquakes or construction accidents.  
If you do not take these precautions, the Plasma Display could  
fall, causing injury or property damage.  
Screws, hooks, chains, and other fittings used to secure the  
Plasma Display vary according to the composition and  
thickness of the surface to which the panel is attached. Inspect  
the mounting surface carefully to determine its thickness and  
composition; consult a professional installer if necessary.  
19  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparation  
05  
NOTE  
Attaching/detaching the PIONEER stand  
(for PRO-940HD only)  
• Install the panel on a flat, stable location to avoid warping the  
glass components.  
The PRO-940HD comes with the PIONEER table top stand  
attached. You can mount the display in a rack by detaching the  
stand. The method for attaching/detaching the stand varies  
depending on the particular panel.  
Reattaching the stand  
1
Fit the stand’s support columns under the Plasma Display  
shown below. Slowly ease the panel down on the  
supports.  
CAUTION  
• Be extremely careful not to insert the stand supports  
into any part of the Plasma Display other than the stand  
insertion slots. If the panel is mounted improperly, the  
communication ports could be damaged or the stand  
could be warped.  
• If mounting the panel on a stand, use only the attached  
stand for this model. Other stand models are not authorized  
for this panel.  
• Two or more people are required to assemble and install this  
unit.  
Detaching the stand  
1
Loosen the two installation bolts ➀ using the enclosed  
hexagonal wrench.  
Line up the column supports with  
the bottom of the Plasma Display .  
Installation bolts  
➀
2
Bolt the Plasma Display to the stand at the points  
indicated by the arrows.  
(M8 x 30 mm: silver)  
2
Remove the two installation bolts ➁ using the same  
hexagonal wrench.  
Installation bolts  
➁
(M8 x 60 mm: silver)  
Installation bolts  
➁
(M8 x 60 mm: silver)  
3
Tighten the installation bolts ➀ firmly using the enclosed  
hexagonal wrench.  
3
Lift the Plasma Display from the stand.  
Installation bolts  
➀
(M8 x 30 mm: silver)  
NOTE  
• Install the panel on a flat, stable location to avoid warping the  
glass components.  
• Insert the screws in the holes vertically.  
• Do not tighten them with more force than necessary.  
• Keep the installation bolts ➀ and ➁ for reattaching the  
stand to the Plasma Display at a later date.  
20  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparation  
05  
Cable connections for watching digital  
and/or conventional TV channels  
Inserting the CableCARD™  
The Plasma Display provides a slot for inserting a  
CableCARD™. When you are watching digital and/or High  
Definition TV channels over cable, the card allows you to use  
the cable company’s Point of Deployment (POD) service. This  
service presents various types of useful information in Internet-  
styled text.  
This system is equipped with two terminals for inputting TV  
broadcasting signals, ANT/CABLE A IN and ANT B IN. The  
ANT/CABLE A IN terminal accepts both digital and  
conventional TV broadcasting signals while the ANT B IN  
terminal accepts only conventional TV broadcasting signals.  
When using cable TV to watch digital and/or conventional TV  
channels, connect to the ANT/CABLE A IN terminal as shown.  
To add an outdoor antenna for clearer pictures, connect an  
antenna to the ANT B IN terminal. If your outdoor antenna uses  
a 75-ohm coaxial cable with an F-type connector, plug it into  
the antenna terminal at the rear of the Plasma Display.  
1
Confirm that the ANT/CABLE A IN terminal is connected to  
the Cable Converter box using a coaxial cable.  
2
Slide the slot cover tab on the rear of the Plasma Display  
to the left then remove the cover while pulling the tab’s  
latch down.  
(Viewed from below of the  
Plasma Display)  
Tab  
Connecting VHF/UHF antennas and a Cable  
VHF antenna  
UHF antenna  
1
U/Vmixer  
Coaxial  
2
3
Insert the specified CableCARD™ completely into the slot.  
ANT/  
CABLE A IN  
Plasma Display (rear)  
Coaxial  
Cable TV  
NOTE  
• Be sure to insert only the specified CableCARD™.  
• Do not insert a PC card.  
• The CableCARD™ automatically generates a cable channel  
list. It is unnecessary to activate the “Auto Channel Preset”  
option.  
NOTE  
• Connect coaxial cables as shown above. Signal reception  
may fail if cables are connected improperly.  
• In order to watch cable TV channels, be sure to connect the  
cable to the ANT/CABLE A IN terminal.  
• The ANT/CABLE A IN and ANT B IN terminals must not  
receive the same signals. For example, do not connect the  
cable TV line to both the ANT/CABLE A IN and ANT B IN  
terminals. Similarly, do not connect an antenna cable to  
both the ANT/CABLE A IN and ANT B IN terminals.  
• The TV Guide On Screen™ system may not be available in all  
areas and is not available with satellite systems. In addition,  
as content providers move to digital programming and  
broadcasting, TV Guide data may be unavailable or become  
unavailable.  
Switching between antenna A and B  
To watch broadcasts via the two antennas, press ANT on the  
remote control.  
• While watching a broadcast, press ANTto view the feed from  
the other antenna.  
• While watching in the 2-screen mode (TV image and video  
image) with TV selected, press ANT to view the feed from the  
other antenna.  
• Pressing ANT while watching in the 2-screen mode with two  
TV images displayed has no effect.  
21  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparation  
05  
Allowed operation range of the remote control  
unit  
Preparing the remote control unit  
To use the remote control, point it at the sensor located at the  
bottom right corner of the Plasma Display. The distance from  
the remote control sensor must be within 7 m (23 feet) and the  
angle relative to the sensor must be within 30 degrees left or  
right.  
Inserting batteries  
1
Open the battery cover.  
2
Load the supplied two AA batteries. Insert the negative  
polarity (–) ends first.  
7 m  
30º  
(23 feet)  
30º  
Remotecontrol  
sensor  
• The battery polarities must correspond with the (+) and  
(–) indicators in the battery compartment.  
NOTE  
• Although the SR logo also appears in the lower right corner  
on the PRO-940HD, the sensor is in the same location for  
both panels.  
3
Close the battery cover.  
Cautions regarding the remote control unit  
• Do not expose the remote control to shock, liquid, or high  
humidity.  
• Do not place the remote control unit under direct sunlight,  
the unit may deform.  
• The remote control may not work properly if the panel’s  
remote sensor window is under direct sunlight or strong  
room lighting. If the remote control fails to function in a  
bright environment, try changing the signal angle or move  
closer to the panel.  
• Objects placed between the remote control and the panel  
sensor may block the signal.  
• As the batteries become weak, the remote control may need  
to be used closer to the panel. Replace the batteries with  
new ones if necessary.  
• The Plasma Display emits very weak infrared rays from its  
screen. Other nearby equipment using an infrared remote  
control such as a VCR may receive scrambled or incomplete  
commands from its remote control. In this situation, move  
the equipment away from the Plasma Display.  
Cautions regarding batteries  
• The remote control unit cannot operate the system if the  
batteries in the unit are weak. When this happens, replace  
the batteries with new ones.  
• Use alkaline batteries rather than manganese batteries.  
• Do not mix battery brands. Different brands have different  
characteristics.  
• Do not mix old and new batteries. Mixing old and new  
batteries can shorten the life of new batteries or cause  
chemical leakage in old batteries.  
• Do not leave dead batteries in the remote control. Dead  
batteries leak chemicals. If you find any chemical leakage,  
wipe thoroughly with a clean cloth.  
• The batteries supplied with this product may have a shorter  
life expectancy due to storage conditions.  
• If you will not use the remote control unit for an extended  
period of time, remove the batteries.  
• Depending on the environment, infrared rays from the  
Plasma Display may corrupt signals sent by the remote  
control. These IR waves could also require that the remote  
control be used closer to the panel. The strength of infrared  
rays emitted from the screen differs, depending on the  
image being displayed.  
Battery disposal  
When disposing of used batteries, please comply with  
governmental regulations or environmental public  
institution’s rules that apply in your country/area.  
22  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparation  
05  
Connecting the power cord  
Connect the power cord last, after all other components are connected.  
Plasma Display (rear view)  
AC IN terminal is  
located on the upper  
edge of the  
compartment.  
Noise filter  
Partially eliminates noise  
Power cord  
caused by the power source.  
CAUTION  
• Use only the supplied power cord.  
• Use only the specified power supply voltage;  
neglecting this can result in fire or electric shock.  
NOTE  
• For the Plasma Display System, a three-core power  
cord with a ground terminal is used for safety  
reasons. Always connect the power cord to a  
three-pronged outlet and make sure that the cord  
is properly grounded.  
• Always turn the panel’s power OFF when connecting or  
disconnecting power cords.  
• Disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet when the  
Plasma Display Panel is not going to be used for a long  
period of time.  
Routing cables  
When the speakers are installed on the sides  
Rear view  
Speaker cable  
Speed clamp  
Speed clamp  
Speaker cable  
Attaching speed clamps to the main unit  
Attach the speed clamps using the 3 holes (42 inches: 2 holes)  
marked with an arrow ( ) below, depending on your routing system.  
for PRO-1140HD  
Attaching and removing speed clamps  
Insert [1] into an appropriate hole on the rear of the Plasma  
Display then snap [2] into the back of [1] to lock the clamp.  
Speed clamps are designed to be difficult to release once in  
place. Please attach them carefully.  
Use pliers to twist the clamp 90º, pulling outward. The clamp  
may deteriorate over time and become damaged if removed.  
2
1
for PRO-940HD  
NOTE  
• Use the supplied speed clamps as necessary.  
• Bundle speaker cables so that none are pinched.  
23  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operations  
Basic Operations  
06  
Plasma Display  
(PRO-1140HD)  
Turning on the power  
(from Standby)  
POWER button  
1
Press a POWER on the Plasma Display if the POWER ON  
and STANDBY indicators are off.  
• The STANDBY indicator on the Plasma Display lights up  
red.  
POWER ON indicator  
STANDBY indicator  
2
Press TV a on the remote control unit or STANDBY/ON  
on the Plasma Display to turn the system on.  
(PRO-940HD)  
• The POWER ON indicator on the Plasma Display lights  
up blue.  
Turning off the power  
(to Standby)  
1
Press TV a on the remote control unit or STANDBY/ON  
on the Plasma Display.  
• The system enters the standby mode and the image on  
the screen disappears.  
• The STANDBY indicator lights up red.  
POWER ON  
indicator  
STANDBY  
indicator  
• This allows the system to automatically receive digital TV  
program information while in Standby.  
POWER button  
NOTE  
Viewed from below of the display (left).  
• If you are not going to use this system for a long period of  
time, unplug the power cord from the power outlet.  
Plasma Display status indicators  
The table below shows the operational status of the Plasma  
Display Panel. Panel indicators reflect the current status of the  
Plasma Display.  
STANDBY/ON  
button  
Indicator  
System Status  
Status  
(Right side view)  
POWER ON  
STANDBY  
The Plasma Display has been unplugged  
or the Plasma Display is off.  
Power to the system is on.  
The system is in Standby.  
For other than the above, see “Troubleshooting”on page 101.  
CAUTION  
• If the POWER ON and STANDBY indicators are off, the  
system cannot be powered ON. Pressing the TV a or  
STANDBY/ON button has no effect. Press POWER then wait  
for the Standby indicator to light (red).  
• The Plasma Display System consumes some power as long  
as the plug is inserted into an outlet.  
24  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operations  
06  
Plasma Display (right side view)  
Watching TV channels  
TV channels must be programmed into your panel. Refer to  
“Setting up TV channels” on page 35.  
NOTE  
• When watching a digital TV program, you may see  
emergency alert messages scrolling at the top of the screen.  
Those messages are broadcasted by TV stations as  
necessary when in emergency situations.  
CHANNEL +/–  
Selecting the antenna  
After confirming that the Mode switch on the remote control  
has been set to “TV”, press ANT on the remote control unit to  
select antenna A or B.  
• This selection depends on the connections to the panel’s  
antenna input terminals (page 21).  
Changing channels  
To increase the channel number, press CH + on the remote  
control. To decrease the channel number, press CH –.  
• CHANNEL +/– on the Plasma Display operates the same as  
CH +/– on the remote control.  
• Press CH RETURN to switch back to the previous channel.  
Press CH RETURN again to return to the current channel.  
Using 0 – 9 and • (dot) on the remote control unit  
Press any combination of buttons 0 to 9 to select a specific  
channel. To select subchannels, use the • (dot) button.  
EXAMPLE  
• To select channel 5 (1-digit channel), press 5.  
• To select channel 25 (2-digit channel), press 2 then 5.  
• To select channel 125 (3-digit channel), press 1, 2, then 5.  
• To select subchannel 10.01, press 1, 0, • (dot), 0, then 1.  
• To select subchannel 10.001 (for cable TV), press 1, 0,  
• (dot), 0, 0, then 1.  
Channel banner  
NOTE  
12:33pm  
DTV 2 • 1002.102  
• After entering a channel or subchannel number, press CH  
ENTER to tune in the channel more quickly.  
• Each time you change a channel, a channel banner appears  
that shows information about the currently selected  
channel. To clear the channel banner, press INFO.  
A
XXXXXXXXXX  
12:30pm — 2:00pm  
XXX  
• If you do not activate the TV Guide On Screen™ system, the  
channel banner may not display certain types of program  
information.  
25  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operations  
06  
Changing the volume and sound  
Changing the language  
If you have selected a digital TV program that provides multi-  
language services, switch among the languages by pressing  
MTS on the remote control.  
To increase the volume, press VOL + on the remote control. To  
decrease the volume, press VOL –.  
• VOLUME +/– on the Plasma Display operates the same as  
VOL +/– on the remote control.  
• To mute the sound output, press MUTING. The symbol “  
appears on the screen. To return to the previous volume,  
press MUTING again. Pressing VOL + also quits muting.  
”
Plasma Display (right side view)  
Each time you press MTS, the language switches.  
NOTE  
VOLUME +/–  
• Switchable languages differ depending on the broadcast.  
• If the language selected through language setting is  
available when the channel or program is changed, you hear  
that language.  
• If you are watching a digital TV program without sound or  
without language information, “N/A” appears on the screen.  
If a language other than English, French, or Spanish is  
selected, “Others” appears on the screen.  
Volume adjustment display  
Muting display  
26  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operations  
06  
When receiving STEREO sound signals  
Setting MTS/SAP mode  
When watching conventional TV programs, use the Multi-  
channel Television Sound (MTS) function to enjoy stereo sound  
and/or Secondary Audio Programs (SAP).  
A
125  
STEREO  
In STEREO mode  
• Stereo broadcasts  
A
125  
Sports, shows, and concerts can be shown with dynamic  
stereo sound.  
STEREO  
In SAP mode  
• SAP broadcasts  
MAIN sound: The normal program soundtrack (either in  
mono or stereo).  
A
125  
SAP sound: Listen to a second language, supplementary  
commentary and other information. (SAP is mono sound.)  
MONO  
In MONO mode  
NOTE  
When receiving MONO + SAP sound signals  
• Conventional TV channels: TV channels received through the  
conventional VHF/UHF frequencies or conventional cable TV  
channels  
A
125  
MONO (SAP)  
In STEREO mode  
• When stereo sound is difficult to hear, manually switch to  
MONO for clearer sound.  
A
125  
• Once MONO is selected, the Plasma Display sound remains  
mono even if the system receives a stereo broadcast. You  
must reselect STEREO to hear stereo sound again.  
SAP (MAIN)  
In SAP mode  
• Selecting MTS while the source is from an INPUT (1 to 6) or  
a PC does not change the type of sound. The video source  
determines the type of sound.  
A
125  
MONO (SAP)  
In MONO mode  
When receiving STEREO + SAP sound signals  
A
125  
STEREO (SAP)  
In STEREO mode  
Press MTS to cycle through the types of sound.  
A
125  
STEREO mode  
SAP mode  
MONO mode  
SAP (STEREO)  
In SAP mode  
STEREO  
SAP  
MONO  
A
125  
MONO (SAP)  
In MONO mode  
NOTE  
• The MTS button is disabled while the TV Guide On Screen™  
system is displayed.  
When receiving MONO sound signals  
A
125  
• In each of the sound types, the display changes according to  
the broadcast signals.  
MONO  
In STEREO mode  
A
125  
MAIN  
In SAP mode  
A
125  
MONO  
In MONO mode  
27  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operations  
06  
Viewing a channel banner  
While watching a TV program, pressing INFO causes a banner  
to appear. Pressing INFO again causes the banner to  
disappear.  
Using the multiscreen functions  
Splitting the screen  
Use the following procedure to select the 2-screen or picture-  
in-picture mode.  
1
2
3
4
2-screen  
12:33pm  
DTV 2 • 1002.102  
A
XXXXXXXXXX  
12:30pm — 2:00pm  
XXX  
7
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Station name  
Current time  
Picture-in-picture  
Channel number  
Input (Ant. A or Ant. B)  
Program title  
Program time schedule  
Channel logo  
TV rating name or icon  
NOTE  
• The above information is not displayed unless included in  
broadcast signals.  
• If you do not activate the TV Guide On Screen™ system, the  
channel banner may not display certain types of program  
information.  
Using the POD service  
If you watch digital and/or High Definition TV channels over  
cable, you can use the POD service provided by the cable TV  
company. This service presents various types of useful  
information, using Internet-style text.  
1
Press SPLIT to select the display mode.  
• Press SPLIT to cycle through the display options: 2-  
screen, picture-in-picture, and single-screen.  
Press HOME MENU, 9, 9, then 9 to view the POD display.  
28  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operations  
06  
• In 2-screen or picture-in-picture mode, press SWAP to  
switch the position of the 2 screens.  
Freezing images  
Use the following procedure to capture and freeze one frame.  
The active screen (left side) is indicated by a “  
”
symbol. The active screen’s picture and sound can be  
adjusted.  
Moving image  
Still image  
• In 2-screen mode, press SCREEN SIZE to change the size  
of the left screen.  
• In picture-in-picture mode, press SHIFT to move the  
position of the small screen counter-clockwise.  
1
2
Press FREEZE.  
A still image appears on the right screen while action  
continues on the left screen.  
Press FREEZE again to cancel the function.  
NOTE  
• Freeze is not available when watching in Split Screen.  
• If this function is not available, a warning message appears.  
• Unless another action is taken, FREEZE automatically  
cancels after five minutes.  
2
To select an input source, press the appropriate input  
source button.  
• Displaying pictures in FREEZE mode for an extended period  
may cause an after-image.  
• If watching conventional TV, press CH +/– to change the  
channel.  
NOTE  
• The SPLIT button is disabled while the TV Guide On Screen™  
system is displayed.  
• The multiscreen function cannot display images from the  
same input source or two external input sources at the same  
time. Attempting to do so causes a warning message to  
appear.  
• Press HOME MENU to return to single-screen viewing. The  
corresponding menu appears.  
• When the two screens show the same analog broadcasting  
coming through antenna A and B, the picture quality may  
differ between the two screens.  
• If you select 19201080p@24 Hz for the main screen in the  
SPLIT mode, video images may not display properly.  
• Displaying pictures in multi-screen mode for an extended  
period may cause an after-image.  
29  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TV Guide On Screen™ System Setup  
TV Guide On Screen™ System Setup  
07  
Reminder Screen  
If you previously skipped TV Guide setup, the Reminder Screen  
appears when you power On the panel.  
About the TV Guide On Screen™ system  
The TV Guide On Screen™ system is a free, interactive on-  
screen television program guide. The system offers program  
listings, searching by keyword, timer recording, reminders and  
more. The TV Guide On Screen™ system is a convenient way to  
find out what’s on right now or during the coming week.  
Listings can be arranged by channel or by genre. It also allows  
you to automatically set your viewing and recording selections  
quickly and easily.  
To make a selection, press  
press ENTER.  
• “Set up TV Guide On Screen now” displays the first setup  
screen.  
• “Remind me to set it up later” returns you to watching TV.  
/
to highlight an option then  
• “Don’t remind me again” returns you to watching TV and  
stops the reminder screen from appearing upon power On.  
Before you can use the TV Guide On Screen™ system, you’ll  
need to set it up.  
Legal Notices  
In the United States, TV GUIDE and other related marks are registered  
marks of Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or one of its affiliates.  
In Canada, TV GUIDE is a registered mark of Transcontinental, Inc. and is  
used under license by Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc.  
NOTE  
• The TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide  
provides listings for cable-ready and digital cable services as  
well as conventional broadcasts. It does not provide listings  
for satellite services.  
• Depending on the current settings and selected items, the  
setup screen order may differ from the one given in this manual.  
Follow the instructions shown on your panel’s screen.  
• TV Guide may not be available in all areas. As content  
providers move to digital programming and broadcasting, TV  
Guide data may be unavailable or become unavailable.  
NOTE  
• If you decide not to set up the Guide immediately, this  
reminder screen appears each time you power On the panel  
unless “Don’t remind me again” is selected.  
Setting up the TV Guide On Screen™  
system  
System Setup Screens  
When the Plasma Display is powered On for the first time, you  
are automatically taken through the setup process. Once the  
panel’s setup is complete, the TV Guide On Screen™ setup  
Welcome Screen appears. Access the TV Guide On Screen™  
setup menu from the initial Setup reminder screens, or by  
pressing TV GUIDE for the first time.  
NOTE  
• Once you start the setup procedure, you cannot return to the  
previous screens. If you realize you entered incorrect  
information, continue with setup. The last screen of the  
procedure gives you the opportunity to correct any mistakes  
before you exit TV Guide On Screen™ setup.  
NOTE  
Screen 1: Country  
• Once you set up the TV Guide On Screen™ system it may  
take up to 24 hours for TV program listings to appear. Initially,  
all eight days of listings may take up to one week to load (see  
Screen 7).  
• This screen asks for the location of your panel.  
• Press  
/
to highlight a country.  
• Press ENTER to display Screen 2.  
Welcome Screen  
Panel setup includes the TV Guide On Screen™ Welcome  
screen.  
Or press TV GUIDE to begin setup.  
• The Welcome Screen lists features in the Guide.  
• Press ENTER to display Screen 1.  
30  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TV Guide On Screen™ System Setup  
07  
Screen 2: Enter ZIP or Postal Code  
• If you selected USA in Screen 1, you see the ZIP Code screen.  
• Input ZIP Code.  
Screen 5: Do you have an antenna connected?  
• If you select “Yes”, you see Screen 6. (Depending on your  
setup configuration, you may see an additional screen. After  
that screen, you see Screen 6.)  
Press the number keys or use  
then to move to another field.  
• Press ENTER to display Screen 3.  
/
to display a number  
• If you select “No”, you see Screen 6.  
/
NOTE  
• If you selected “No” in Screen 3 then you must select “Yes” in  
this screen to receive a channel lineup and listings.  
• If you selected Canada in Screen 1, you see the Postal Code  
screen.  
• Input Postal Code by pressing  
/
to display a character or  
Screen 6: Are the settings correct?  
• If you select “Yes”, you see Screen 7.  
• If you select “No”, you see Screen 1.  
number then to move to another field.  
/
• Press ENTER to display Screen 3.  
Screen 3: Do you have Cable?  
• If you select “Yes”, you see Screen 4.  
• If you select “No”, you see Screen 5.  
Screen 7: Congratulations  
• Press ENTER to display Screen 8.  
Screen 4: Which input terminal is the system plugged  
into?  
• Select “ANT/CABLE A IN” or “ANT B IN” (automatically  
advances to Screen 5 after the selection)  
31  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TV Guide On Screen™ System Setup  
07  
Screen 8: Is a VCR Connected?  
Screen 11: VCR Preparation  
• If you select “Yes”, you see Screen 9.  
• If you select “No”, you see Screen 14.  
• Follow the on-screen instructions then press ENTER to  
display Screen 12.  
Screen 12: VCR Code Testing  
Screen 9: VCR Configuration Diagram  
• When testing is done, Screen 13 displays automatically.  
• This screen shows the correct way to install the G-LINK cable  
from the back of the device to the recording device. Make  
sure the G-LINK cable is properly installed.  
• Press ENTER to advance to Screen 10.  
Screen 13: Did your VCR stop playing?  
Screen 10: VCR Brand Name  
• Press  
/
to select the brand of the recording device.  
• Press ENTER to advance to Screen 11.  
• If you select “Yes”, you see Screen 14.  
• If you select “No”, a different code is tested from Screen 12.  
NOTE  
• Many VCRs require testing of more than one code to ensure  
proper operation with the TV Guide On Screen™ system.  
If you select “Test this code again”, the same code from  
Screen 12 is sent again.  
32  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TV Guide On Screen™ System Setup  
07  
Screen 14: Confirming Your Settings  
Verify that the Setup information is correct.  
• If it is, select “Yes, end setup” to advance to Screen 15.  
• If it is not, select “No, repeat setup process”, to return to  
Screen 1.  
Screen 15: Congratulations  
• You have successfully completed Setup!  
• Press ENTER to advance to Screen 16.  
Screen 16: Helpful Information  
• This screen provides valuable information on using the TV  
Guide.  
• Press ENTER to watch TV.  
33  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu Setup  
Menu Setup  
08  
PC mode menus  
Menu Configuration  
Home Menu  
Item  
Page  
55  
AV mode menus  
Picture  
AV Selection  
Contrast  
Brightness  
Red  
56  
Home Menu  
Item  
Page  
55  
56  
Picture  
AV Selection  
Contrast  
Brightness  
Color  
56  
56  
Green  
56  
56  
Blue  
56  
56  
Reset  
56  
Tint  
56  
Sharpness  
Pro Adjust  
Reset  
56  
Sound  
Treble  
60  
60  
60  
60  
61  
61  
56  
Bass  
56  
Balance  
Reset  
Sound  
Treble  
60  
60  
60  
60  
61  
61  
FOCUS  
Front Surround  
Bass  
Balance  
Reset  
Power Control  
Energy Save  
61  
62  
Power Management  
FOCUS  
Front Surround  
Sleep Timer  
Option  
55  
Auto Setup  
62  
63  
Power Control  
Energy Save  
61  
61  
62  
Manual Setup  
No Signal off  
No Operation off  
Home Media Gallery  
73 – 89  
Sleep Timer  
Option  
55  
Menu operations  
The following describes the typical procedure for setting up the  
menus. For the actual procedures, see the appropriate pages  
that describe individual functions.  
Position  
62  
Auto Size  
64  
4:3 Mode  
64  
Side Mask  
HDMI Input  
Monitor Out  
Digital Audio Out  
Language  
65  
67  
68, 69  
70  
1
2
Press HOME MENU.  
65  
Press  
/
(scroll) to select a menu item then press  
ENTER.  
Tuner Setup  
Parental Control  
Favorites  
36 – 40  
41  
3
Scroll down to the desired submenu item.  
• The number of menu layers differs depending on the  
menu items.  
• If you select “Tuner Setup”, a menu bar appears at the  
bottom of the screen. To select a submenu item on the  
Channel Setup  
Closed Captions  
Clock  
35  
41 – 42  
42  
bar, press  
/
instead of  
/
.
4
5
Press  
/
to select an option (or parameter) then press  
ENTER.  
Home Media Gallery  
73 – 89  
• For some menu items, press  
/
instead of  
/
.
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
NOTE  
• To return to the upper menu levels, press RETURN.  
34  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tuner Setup  
Tuner Setup  
09  
7
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
Setting up TV channels  
This section describes how to search and set up TV channels.  
Unless you set up TV channels using Auto Channel Preset, you  
may not be able to tune in all available channels.  
NOTE  
• To restore skipped channels, use the above procedure but  
select (add a check mark) a channel in step 6.  
• When using the Cable Converter, you may need to manually  
add Cable Converter output channels. Press ENTER after  
each selection.  
Using Auto Channel Preset  
Auto Channel Preset automatically searches and sets up TV  
channels. Press ENTER after each selection.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press HOME MENU.  
Setting up TV channels manually  
This section describes how to manually set up TV channels that  
have not been set up by Auto Channel Preset. Press ENTER  
after each selection.  
Select “Tuner Setup”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
Select “Channel Setup”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
Select “Ant. A” or “Ant. B”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press HOME MENU.  
Select “Auto Channel Preset”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
Select “Tuner Setup”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
Select “Air” or “Cable”. ( then ENTER)  
/
Select “Channel Setup”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
Select “Ant. A” or “Ant. B”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
Channel Setup  
Ant. A  
Ant. A  
Auto Ch. Preset Cable  
Select “Add Channel”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
Air  
Cable  
Auto Channel Preset  
2.0  
4.0  
6.0  
Select a channel number to be added. (  
/
then ENTER)  
D
Enter  
Home Menu  
Exit  
Begin Preset  
Cancel  
• You can also use buttons 0 – 9 to enter a channel  
number.  
• Channel search automatically starts.  
Channel Setup Ant. A  
Add Channel  
Channel Setup  
Ant. A  
Auto Ch. Preset Cable  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
Ant. A  
Add Channel  
000  
1
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
One Moment Please …  
Ant. A  
Auto Channel Preset • Cable  
Home Menu Exit  
D
Home Menu  
Cancel  
Exit  
• A confirmation screen appears after ENTER is pressed.  
Press A to complete the setup process.  
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
• To quit Auto Channel Preset, press D.  
7
8
7
After Auto Channel Preset finishes, press HOME MENU to  
exit the menu.  
NOTE  
NOTE  
• To include analog channels, manually add these channels.  
Digital channels cannot be added manually.  
• When using the Cable Converter, you may need to manually  
add Cable Converter output channels.  
• When a CableCARD is functioning, select “Ant.B” in step 4  
to run Auto Channel Preset.  
Checking signal strength  
When you have selected antenna A, check the current  
channel’s signal strength. Also, use this function when  
receiving a channel through a VHF/UHF antenna. Press ENTER  
after each selection.  
Setting for skipping unwanted channels  
From among TV channels added using Auto Channel Preset,  
you can select channels to be skipped using CH+/-. Press  
ENTER after each selection.  
1
2
3
4
5
Press HOME MENU.  
Select “Tuner Setup”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press HOME MENU.  
Select “Channel Setup”. (  
Select “Ant. A”. (  
Select “Signal Strength”. (  
/
Select “Tuner Setup”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
/
Select “Channel Setup”. (  
Select “Ant. A” or “Ant. B”. (  
Select “Channel Keep/Skip”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
/
then ENTER)  
/
then ENTER)  
Channel Setup  
Ant. A  
Signal Strength  
/
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
Maximum: 100  
Current: 100  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
Ant. A  
Signal Strength  
Select a channel to be skipped. (  
/
Home Menu  
Exit  
Channel Setup Ant. A  
Channel Keep/Skip  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
• Adjust the antenna direction to maximize the signal  
strength.  
Ant. A  
Channel Keep/Skip  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
2.0  
4.0  
6.0  
Home Menu Exit  
6
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
• The check mark next to the channel disappears.  
35  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tuner Setup  
09  
Voluntary movie rating system (MPAA)  
NOTE  
Rating Description  
• This function is available only when receiving digital  
broadcasting signals.  
• When you use the TV Guide On Screen™ system with a cable  
service, select “Cable” for “Auto Channel Preset”.  
• Executing more than one scan for cables can cause  
broadcast reception to fail.  
N/A  
G
Not applicable for MPAA ratings  
General audiences. All ages admitted.  
PG  
Parental guidance suggested. Some material may  
not be suitable for children.  
PG-13  
R
Parents strongly cautioned. Some material may be  
inappropriate for children under 13.  
Age-Base  
Checking the CableCARD ID  
Restricted. Under 17 requires accompanying  
parent or adult guardian (age varies in some  
jurisdictions).  
The Plasma Display has a slot for a CableCARD that is used for  
managing your information by the cable TV company. The  
CableCARD slot is located on the rear of the Plasma Display.  
To check your CableCARD ID and the Host ID, follow these  
steps.  
NC-17  
NR  
No one 17 and under admitted.  
Not rated.  
1
2
3
4
Press HOME MENU.  
NOTE  
Select “Tuner Setup”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
/ then ENTER)  
• The voluntary movie rating system uses an age-based rating.  
Select “Channel Setup”. (  
Select “POD ID”. (  
/
)
TV ratings  
• The Host ID and CableCARD ID appear.  
Rating Description  
5
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
TV-Y  
All children  
TV-Y7  
TV-G  
Children 7 and above  
General audiences  
Parental Control  
With the Parental Control, adults can prevent younger  
audiences from watching inappropriate TV programs, VCR  
tapes or DVD contents. When an attempt is made to watch a  
blocked program (or content), the Plasma Display shows a  
message over a black screen. The Parental Control applies to  
both conventional and digital TV channels.  
Age-Base  
TV-PG  
TV-14  
Parental guidance suggested  
Parents strongly cautioned  
TV-MA Mature audiences only  
There are three rating systems in the United States: the TV  
ratings, TV Parental Guidelines, and movie ratings. Movie  
ratings are provided by the Motion Picture Association of  
America (MPAA) and are used for original movies not edited  
for television.  
NOTE  
• The system also allows you to select “None”, which blocks  
programs with a rating of “None”.  
For the rating system in Canada, see page 38.  
Changing the password  
Using a password prevents others from changing Parental  
Control settings. The 4-digit password is 1234. Use the  
following procedure to change the password.  
NOTE  
• In the U.S. TV Parental Guideline Rating System, programs  
with a rating of “None” may be blocked on this product.  
Examples of programs with a “None” rating include:  
1
2
3
4
5
Press HOME MENU.  
• Emergency Bulletins (such as EAS messages, weather  
warning and others)  
• Locally originated programming  
• News  
• Political  
• Public Service Announcements  
• Religious  
• Sports  
Select “Tuner Setup”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
Select “Change Password”. ( then ENTER)  
Select “Parental Control”. (  
Select “Password”. (  
/
/
/
Parental Control  
Password  
Password  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
• Weather  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
Change Password  
Clear Password  
• No Parental Control settings can be entered for INPUT 5 and  
INPUT 6.  
Home Menu  
Exit  
6
7
8
Enter the current 4-digit password, using the number  
buttons  
.
Enter a 4-digit password to be newly set, using the number  
buttons.  
When prompted, enter the same password again.  
• A confirmation screen appears.  
9
Press A.  
36  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tuner Setup  
09  
10 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
2
3
4
5
Select “Tuner Setup”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
Select “Parental Control”. (  
Select “MPAA Ratings”. (  
/
NOTE  
/
• Write down the password and keep it somewhere safe.  
Select the desired rating and change the setting. (  
then ENTER)  
/
Clearing the password  
Use the following procedure to clear the password.  
Parental Control  
MPAA Ratings  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
1
2
3
4
5
Press HOME MENU.  
Blocked MPAA Ratings  
MPAA Ratings  
N/A  
G
PG  
N/A, G, PG,PG-13, R, NC-17  
Select “Tuner Setup”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
Select “Clear Password”. ( then ENTER)  
Home Menu  
Exit  
Select “Parental Control”. (  
Select “Password”. (  
/
/
• The password entry screen appears.  
6
7
Enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons.  
• Each time you press ENTER, the setting is switched.  
• A lock icon appears beside the blocked rating.  
• The Plasma Display ships with all ratings unblocked.  
/
Parental Control  
Password  
Password  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
Change Password  
Clear Password  
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
Home Menu  
Exit  
NOTE  
6
Enter the current 4-digit password, using the number  
buttons.  
• A confirmation screen appears.  
• Blocking a rating causes more severe ratings to be  
automatically blocked as well. Likewise, unblocking a rating  
causes less severe ratings to be automatically unblocked.  
7
8
Press A.  
Setting the TV ratings  
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
1
2
3
4
5
Press HOME MENU.  
NOTE  
Select “Tuner Setup”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
• The above procedure resets the password to the factory  
default (1234).  
Select “Parental Control”. (  
Select “TV Ratings”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
/
then ENTER)  
Select the desired rating and change the setting. (  
then ENTER)  
/
Activating the Parental Control  
1
2
3
4
5
Press HOME MENU.  
Parental Control  
TV Ratings  
TV Ratings  
Select “Tuner Setup”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
TV-None  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
TV-Y  
Select “Parental Control”. (  
Select “Status”. (  
Select “On”. (  
/
Blocked TV Ratings  
TV-Y7  
TV-G  
/
TV-PG  
Home Menu  
Exit  
/
• The password entry screen appears.  
• The password entry screen appears.  
6
7
Enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons.  
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
6
7
Enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons.  
• Each time you press ENTER, the setting is switched.  
• A lock icon appears beside the blocked rating.  
• The Plasma Display ships with all ratings unblocked.  
Setting the voluntary movie rating system  
(MPAA)  
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
1
Press HOME MENU.  
We suggest you write down your password and keep in a safe place.  
If you forget the password  
PRO-1140HD/PRO-940HD  
Your password No.:  
When the message “Enter your Password” is displayed in step 6  
under “Clearing the password”, press the ENTER button on the  
remote control unit and hold it down for 3 seconds or longer.  
The password reverts to “1234”.  
37  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tuner Setup  
09  
NOTE  
Canadian rating systems  
Choose either the Canadian English ratings or the Canadian  
French ratings. These ratings are based on the Canadian  
Radio-Television and Telecommunications Commission  
(CRTC) policy.  
• Blocking a rating causes more severe ratings to be  
automatically blocked. Likewise, unblocking a rating causes  
less severe ratings to be automatically unblocked.  
Setting the TV Parental Guidelines (TV  
Guidelines)  
Canadian English ratings  
Rating Description  
1
2
3
4
5
Press HOME MENU.  
E
Exempt: Includes news, sports, documentaries  
and other information programming; talk shows,  
music videos, and variety programming.  
Select “Tuner Setup”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
Select “TV Parental Guidelines”. ( then ENTER)  
Select “Parental Control”. (  
/
/
C
Children: Intended for younger children under the  
age of 8 years. Pays careful attention to themes  
that could threaten their sense of security and  
well-being.  
Select the desired rating and change the setting. (  
then ENTER)  
/
C8+  
Children over 8 years old: Contains no portrayal of  
violence as the preferred, acceptable, or only way  
to resolve conflict; nor encourages children to  
imitate dangerous acts which they may see on the  
screen.  
Parental Control  
TV Parental Guidelines  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
Blocked TV Parental Guidelines  
TV Parental Guidelines  
Fantasy Violence  
Violence  
Sexual Situations  
Home Menu  
Exit  
G
General: Considered acceptable for all age  
groups. Appropriate viewing for the entire family,  
contains very little violence, physical, verbal or  
emotional.  
• The password entry screen appears.  
6
7
Enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons.  
• Each time you press ENTER, the setting is switched.  
• A lock icon appears beside the blocked rating.  
• The Plasma Display ships with all ratings unblocked.  
Age-Base  
PG  
14+  
Parental Guidance: Intended for a general  
audience, but may not be suitable for younger  
children (under the age of 8) because it could  
contain controversial themes or issues.  
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
Over 14 Years: Could contain themes where  
violence is one of the dominant elements of the  
storyline, but it must be integral to the  
development of plot or character. Language usage  
could be profane and nudity present within the  
context of the theme.  
Blocking Not Rated TV programs  
Use the following procedure to block TV programs whose  
rating information is unavailable.  
1
2
3
4
5
Press HOME MENU.  
18+  
Adults: Intended for viewers 18 years and older  
and might contain depictions of violence, which  
while related to the development of plot, character  
or themes, are intended for adult viewing. Could  
contain graphic language and portrayals of sex  
and nudity.  
Select “Tuner Setup”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
Select “Parental Control”. (  
Select “Unavailable Ratings”. (  
Select “Block” or “Don’t Block”. (  
/
/
then ENTER)  
/
then ENTER)  
Parental Control  
Unavailable Ratings  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
Unavailable Ratings  
Block  
Don’t Block  
Home Menu  
Exit  
• The password entry screen appears.  
6
7
Enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons.  
• The Plasma Display ships with all ratings unblocked.  
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
38  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tuner Setup  
09  
Canadian French ratings  
Setting Canadian French ratings  
Rating Description  
1
2
3
4
5
Press HOME MENU.  
E
Exempt programming.  
Select “Tuner Setup”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
Select “Canadian French Ratings”. ( then ENTER)  
G
General: All ages and children, contains minimal  
direct violence, but may be integrated into the plot  
in a humorous or unrealistic manner.  
Select “Parental Control”. (  
/
/
8ans+  
General but inadvisable for young children: May  
be viewed by a wide public audience, but could  
contain scenes disturbing to children under eight  
who cannot distinguish between imaginary and  
real situations. Recommended for viewing with  
parent.  
Select the desired rating and change the setting. (  
then ENTER)  
/
Parental Control  
Canadian French Ratings  
Age-Base  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
Blocked Canadian French Ratings  
E, G, 8 ans+, 13 ans+, 16 ans+, 18  
ans+  
Canadian French Ratings  
E
G
13ans+ Over 13 years: Could contain scenes of frequent  
violent scenes and therefore recommended for  
viewing with parent.  
8 ans+  
Home Menu  
Exit  
• The password entry screen appears.  
16ans+ Over 16 years: Could contain frequent violent  
scenes and intense violence.  
6
7
Enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons.  
• Each time you press ENTER, the setting is switched.  
• A lock icon appears beside the blocked rating.  
• The Plasma Display ships with all ratings unblocked.  
18ans+ Over 18 years: Only for adult viewing. Could  
contain frequent violent scenes and extreme  
violence.  
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
Setting Canadian English ratings  
NOTE  
1
2
3
4
5
Press HOME MENU.  
• Blocking a rating causes more severe ratings to be  
automatically blocked. Likewise, unblocking a rating causes  
less severe ratings to be automatically unblocked.  
Select “Tuner Setup”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
Select “Canadian English Ratings”. ( then ENTER)  
Select “Parental Control”. (  
/
/
Setting new ratings  
Digital broadcasts now carry new ratings that are not  
compatible with the Plasma Display Panel’s original Parental  
Control settings. When you first tune in one of these  
broadcasts, a New Parental Control menu appears on the  
screen. This tells you that you must now change your Parental  
Control settings to handle these new ratings. Otherwise,  
previously blocked ratings may become unblocked.  
Select then change to the desired rating. (  
ENTER)  
/
then  
Parental Control  
Canadian English Ratings  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
Blocked Canadian English Ratings  
Canadian English Ratings  
E
C
C8+  
Home Menu  
Exit  
1
2
3
Press HOME MENU.  
Select “Tuner Setup”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
• The password entry screen appears.  
Select “Parental Control”. (  
/
6
7
Enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons.  
• Each time you press ENTER, the setting is switched.  
• A lock icon appears beside the blocked rating.  
• The Plasma Display ships with all ratings unblocked.  
Parental Control  
Status  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
Status  
MPAA Ratings  
TV Ratings  
New XXXXXXXXXXXXX  
Home Menu  
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
Exit  
• The new menu is displayed when Status is selected. The  
message “Regional ratings have changed. Set Parental  
Control ratings again.” appears on the right of the  
screen.  
NOTE  
• Blocking a rating causes more severe ratings to be  
automatically blocked. Likewise, unblocking a rating causes  
less severe ratings to be automatically unblocked.  
39  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tuner Setup  
09  
4
Select and change the desired rating. (  
/
then ENTER)  
Temporarily deactivating the Parental Control  
When the activated Parental Control senses a blocked TV  
program (or content), the Plasma Display shows a message  
over a blank screen.  
The method for temporarily deactivating the Parental Control  
differs, depending on the selected input source.  
New (xxx)  
Parental Control  
Unavailable Ratings  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
New (xxx)  
New (xxx)  
XX  
XX  
New (xxx)  
Password  
Home Menu  
Exit  
Antenna A or antenna B:  
The following screen appears. Press ENTER.  
• The menu appears between “Unavailable Ratings” and  
“Password”.  
• The password entry screen appears.  
Parental Control  
5
6
Enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons.  
• Each time you press ENTER, the setting is switched.  
• A lock icon appears beside the blocked rating.  
• When you are finished, the word “New” disappears from  
the Parental Control menu.  
WWWWWWW  
1000.0000  
(Ant. B)  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
Enter Disable Parental Control  
Enter your 4-digit password.  
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
Parental Control  
Enter your Password  
Deleting new ratings  
A
Clear Entry  
D
Cancel  
You can delete a New Parental Control menu. When the menu  
is deleted, all blocks are removed.  
• The password entry screen appears for approximately 60  
seconds. If the screen disappears prematurely, press ENTER  
to reveal the screen again.  
1
2
3
4
Press HOME MENU.  
Select “Tuner Setup”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
Input 1 – 4:  
Select “Parental Control”. (  
/
Enter your 4-digit password. Pressing ENTER again causes the  
Select “Status” and then “Off”. (  
/
password entry screen to disappear.  
Parental Control  
Status  
Status  
Please InputYour Password.  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxx  
Off  
Enter your Password  
Home Menu  
Exit  
A
Clear Entry  
D
• The above password entry screen also appears during 2-  
screen mode, picture-in-picture, and while freezing an  
image.  
Cancel  
• The password entry screen appears.  
• The password entry screen appears for approximately 60  
seconds. After the screen disappears, pressing ENTER  
causes it to appear again.  
5
6
Enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons.  
Select A for “Accept” or D for “Cancel”.  
Parental Control  
Status  
Status  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxx  
Off  
_ _ _ _  
Reset Digital regional ratings?  
Home Menu  
Exit  
A
Accept  
D
Cancel  
• The New Parental Control menu remains. However, if no  
settings are entered within 60 seconds, the selection  
screen for deleting new ratings disappears.  
7
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
NOTE  
• Broadcasts with new (arriving) ratings are not reflected while  
the Parental Control menu is open.  
• Blocking a rating causes more severe ratings to be  
automatically blocked. Likewise, unblocking a rating causes  
less severe ratings to be automatically unblocked.  
40  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tuner Setup  
09  
Activating the closed caption  
Setting your favorite channels  
1
2
3
4
5
Press HOME MENU.  
Set up to 10 TV channels for each of the four color buttons on  
the remote control (40 channels in total).  
Select “Tuner Setup”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
Select “On” or “On If Mute”. ( then ENTER)  
1
2
3
4
5
Press HOME MENU.  
Select “Closed Captions”. (  
Select “Status”. (  
/
Select “Tuner Setup”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
Select a color button (A, B, C, D). (  
/
Select “Favorites”. (  
/
/
/
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
Closed Captions  
Status  
Status  
Select a TV channel to be registered. (  
/
Off  
On  
On If Mute  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
A
Favorites  
Favorites  
Favorites  
B
A
B
A
B
8.0  
9.0  
9.0  
11.0  
11.0  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
Current Favorites A Line Up  
Home Menu  
Exit  
A
B0008.000  
A0011.000  
A0009.000  
Item  
Description  
Home Menu  
Exit  
Off  
Does not show closed captions  
• A star appears beside the favorite channels currently  
selected.  
• To register another TV channel under the same color  
button, repeat step 5. To register another TV channel  
under a different color button, repeat steps 4 and 5.  
(factory default)  
On  
Always shows closed captions  
On If Mute  
Shows closed captions only when sound is being  
muted  
6
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
6
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
Selecting the type of conventional closed  
captions  
Select a conventional TV channel before deciding on a type of  
closed captioning. Some digital TV programs provide only  
conventional closed captions.  
• “CC1”, “CC2”, “CC3”, or “CC4” displays subtitles of TV dramas  
and news programs while allowing a full view of the picture.  
• “Text1”, “Text2”, “Text3”, or “Text4” superimposes information  
over the picture (e.g. TV guide, weather) that is independent  
from the TV program in progress.  
Setting up closed captions  
Your Plasma Display System is equipped with an internal  
closed caption decoder. Closed caption allows you to view  
conversations, narration, and sound effects in TV programs  
and home videos as subtitles on your Plasma Display screen.  
Many digital TV programs also offer closed captioning. Digital  
closed captions support changing parameters such as fonts  
and colors.  
• Not all programs and videos offer closed caption. Please look  
for the “  
” symbol to check for closed captioning on a  
1
2
3
4
5
Press HOME MENU.  
program or video.  
Select “Tuner Setup”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
Select “Closed Captions”. (  
Select “Analog Settings”. (  
/
/
Select the desired closed caption. (  
/
Closed Captions  
Analog Settings  
Analog Settings  
CC1  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
CC2  
CC3  
CC4  
Text 1  
Home Menu  
Exit  
• The factory default is “CC1”.  
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
6
41  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tuner Setup  
09  
The following table shows the available parameters for each  
item.  
Selecting digital closed captions  
Use the following procedure to select digital closed captions:  
Service 1 to 6.  
Item  
Selection  
Font Size  
Auto/ Large/ Standard/ Small  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press HOME MENU.  
1
Auto/ Font 1/ Font 2/ Font 3/ Font 4/ Font 5/ Font 6/  
Font 7  
Font  
Select “Tuner Setup”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
Select “Closed Captions”. (  
Select “Digital Settings”. (  
Select “Digital Service”. (  
/
Font Color  
Auto/ Black/ White/ Red/ Green/ Blue/ Yellow/  
Magenta/ Cyan  
/
then ENTER)  
Font Opacity  
Auto/ Solid/ Transparent/ Translucent/Flashing  
/
then ENTER)  
Background  
Color  
Auto/ Black/ White/ Red/ Green/ Blue/ Yellow/  
Magenta/ Cyan  
Select the desired closed caption. (  
/
then ENTER)  
Closed Captions  
Digital Settings  
Digital Settings  
Digital Service  
Digital Service  
Background  
Opacity  
Auto/ Solid/ Transparent/ Translucent  
Service 1  
Service 2  
Service 3  
Service 4  
Service 5  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
1
Font 1 (monospaced with serifs)/ Font 2 (proportionally spaced with serifs)/  
Font 3 (monospaced without serifs)/ Font 4 (proportionally spaced without ser-  
ifs)/ Font 5 (casual font)/ Font 6 (cursive font)/ Font 7 (small capitals font)  
Home Menu  
Exit  
With “Auto” selected, parameters specified by the provider are  
used. If not specified by the provider, the bolded default  
parameters are used. Selected parameters override any other  
parameters, including those from the provider.  
• The factory default is “Service 1”.  
7
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
NOTE  
• When available, the Primary Caption Service is usually  
offered for Service 1, and the Secondary Language Service is  
usually offered for Service 2.  
Clock Setting  
With “Auto Set” selected for Clock Setting, the system acquires  
and sets the time automatically. You can also manually set the  
time. If power is lost (unplugged or power outage), the set time  
is cleared.  
Selecting digital closed caption parameters  
Use the following procedure to change digital closed captions  
parameters such as font size, font type, foreground and  
background colors.  
1
2
3
4
5
Press HOME MENU.  
Select “Tuner Setup”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
1
2
3
4
5
Press HOME MENU.  
Select “Clock”. (  
Select “Time Zone”. (  
Select a time zone for your area. (  
/
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
Select “Tuner Setup”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
/
Select “Closed Captions”. (  
Select “Digital Settings”. (  
/
/
/
Clock  
Time Zone  
Select “Font Size”, “Font”, or any other item. (  
ENTER)  
/
then  
Current Time:  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
Atlantic  
Eastern  
Central  
9:55 pm EDT  
Monday  
Time Zone  
6
Select the desired parameter. (  
/
then ENTER)  
05/17/04  
Mountain  
Home Menu  
Exit  
Closed Captions  
Digital Settings  
Digital Settings  
Font Size  
Font Size  
Large  
Standard  
Small  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
6
7
Select “D.S.T.”. (  
Select “Applies” or “Does Not Apply”. (  
• Set this option if your area uses Daylight Savings Time.  
,
/
, then ENTER)  
/
then ENTER)  
Home Menu  
Exit  
Clock  
D.S.T.  
Daylight Savings Time  
7
8
Repeat steps 5 and 6 as necessary. (  
,
/
)
Current Time:  
9:56 pm EDT  
Monday  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
Applies  
Does Not Apply  
05/17/04  
Home Menu  
Exit  
8
9
Select “Auto/Manual Set”. (  
,
/
, then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
Select “Auto Set” or “Manual Set”. (  
/
42  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tuner Setup  
09  
10 If you chose “Auto Set”, select an antenna (A or B) and a  
channel number using  
/
and ENTER.  
Clock  
Auto/Manual Set  
Clock Set Channel  
Current Time:  
11:58 pm PDT  
Monday  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
Auto/Manual Set •Auto Set  
Ant. A  
2.0  
05/17/04  
Home Menu  
Exit  
• The date and time is corrected automatically using data  
from the selected channel.  
If you select “Manual Set”, manually set the date and time  
using  
/
,
/
and ENTER.  
Clock  
Auto/Manual Set  
Date and Time  
3
Current Time:  
11:58 pm PDT  
Monday  
4
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
Auto/Manual Set •Manual Set  
3
5
6
/17/04 11:58pm  
05/17/04  
Home Menu  
Exit  
11 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
NOTE  
• If the TV Guide On Screen™ system is active, the Plasma  
Display accesses time through the TV Guide On Screen™  
system. When the TV Guide is providing the time data, you  
cannot set up the clock using the menu. If you select a  
parameter for the Clock menu then press ENTER, the menu  
screen disappears and a dialog box appears. Press A to clear  
the dialog box.  
43  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TV Guide On Screen™ System Operation  
TV Guide On Screen™ System Operation  
10  
TV Guide On Screen™ icons  
Various icons are used to convey information or show the  
status of an item. These icons can be on the Info Bar, inside the  
Info Box, or beside program titles.  
Using the TV Guide On Screen™ system  
Before you can use the TV Guide On Screen™ system, you’ll  
need to set it up. If you haven’t already done this, please turn to  
“TV Guide On Screen™ System Setup”on page 30 before  
proceeding.  
•
•
Info icon – Alerts that additional information is  
available (press INFO to display)  
In order to record TV programs with a VCR, you need to  
correctly connect the equipment to the Plasma Display. For  
VCR connection information, see page 69.  
Progress Bar – Shows the elapsed time of the  
current program  
NOTE  
•
HDTV – Indicates that a program is a high-definition  
broadcast  
• The TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide  
provides listings for cable-ready and digital cable services as  
well as conventional broadcast. It does not provide listings  
for satellite services.  
• Once the TV Guide On Screen™ system is activated it may  
take up to 24 hours to begin receiving TV program listings.  
Initially, of all eight days of listings may take up to one week  
to load.  
•
•
New – The program is new (not a repeat)  
Stereo – The program is broadcast in stereo  
•
CC – The program is broadcast with closed captioning  
• TV Guide may not be available in all areas. As content  
providers move to digital programming and broadcasting, TV  
Guide data may be unavailable or become unavailable.  
•
•
•
TV Rating – Indicates the age rating for the program  
Record Once – One-time only recording  
Record Daily – Records the same channel and time  
every Monday through Friday (manual recording only)  
Screen components  
Many of the screens have common elements to make using the  
system easier.  
•
•
•
Record Regularly – Records the same program any day  
it airs on the same channel at the same time  
1
2
3
4
5
Record Weekly – Records a program every week at the  
same time/day  
6
9
7
8
Record Suspend – The program is set to record, but is  
suspended because of a conflict with another recording or  
auto tune reminder. The recording resumes when the  
conflict is cleared.  
•
Record Off – The program remains in the SCHEDULE  
list but is not recorded until the frequency is changed to one  
of the above  
•
•
Remind Once – One-time only reminder  
10  
12  
11  
13  
1
TV GUIDE logo  
Clock – Shows the current time  
Time slot – Half-hour time slots are displayed horizontally  
Time tab – Indicates the currently selected time slot  
Current service label – Indicates the currently selected  
service  
Service bar – Gives access to the various TV Guide  
services.  
Title – Shows the title of the TV program  
Info Bar – Shows various icons to convey information or  
show the status of an item  
Video window – Allows you to continue watching the  
current program while using the Guide  
Remind Daily – Reminds for the same channel and time  
every Monday through Friday (manual reminder only)  
2
3
4
5
•
•
•
Remind Regularly – Reminds the same program any  
day it airs on the same channel at the same time  
Remind Weekly – Reminds every week at the same  
time/day  
6
7
8
Remind Suspend – A reminder is set for the program,  
but is suspended because of a conflict with another auto  
tune reminder or recording. The reminder resumes when the  
conflict is cleared.  
9
•
Remind Off – The program remains in the SCHEDULE  
list but the reminder is held until the frequency is changed to  
one of the above.  
10 Panel ads and panel menu entry – Space for show or  
product advertising (and the panel menu)  
11 Channel logo  
12 Info Box – Shows information about the highlighted item  
13 Channel ads – Space to advertise upcoming programs and  
specials  
44  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TV Guide On Screen™ System Operation  
10  
TV Guide On Screen™ navigation  
The table below summarizes the TV Guide On Screen™ system  
navigation buttons for the remote control.  
The Listings screen  
The Listings screen is the main menu for the TV Guide On  
Screen™ system. This is the screen you see when you press TV  
GUIDE.  
Key  
What it does  
Options on the Listings screen include:  
• View eight days of program listings.  
• Display information about individual programs.  
• Select a program to start watching.  
• Set a reminder about a program.  
TV GUIDE  
Press to display the TV Guide On Screen™ system  
(also use to exit).  
Use to navigate screens (highlight an item)  
/
/
/
ENTER  
Press to confirm a selection or execute an action  
• Set a program to record.  
• See a thumbnail of any channel in the video window.  
• Access panel and channel ads.  
Can also be used to display the panel menu when  
a future program is highlighted  
MENU  
INFO  
Press to display a panel menu  
1
Press TV GUIDE to display the Listings screen.  
Press to cycle through the available information  
for the current program or screen  
REC  
Press to set the highlighted program to record  
Use for numeric entry  
Number buttons  
PAGE +/–  
Press to select the previous/next page of  
information (where applicable)  
DAY +/–  
Press to jump to the next/previous day of program  
listings (if applicable)  
You can also use the panel’s buttons, TV GUIDE, ENTER, UP/  
DOWN, and LEFT/RIGHT to make selections. The UP/DOWN  
and LEFT/RIGHT buttons operate the same as the  
/
and  
/
• With “LISTINGS” highlighted in the Service bar (top of  
the screen), press INFO to display (then close) Help  
information.  
buttons on the remote control.  
• Press TV GUIDE anytime to exit.  
2
3
Press  
/
/
/
to navigate the Listings screen.  
• With a program highlighted, press ENTER to start  
watching that program.  
• Move right for programs showing at later times.  
• Press PAGE+/– to scroll one menu page at a time.  
• Press INFO to display additional information (if  
available) about the currently selected show.  
• Press DAY+/– to jump to the next/previous day in the  
listings grid.  
To set the highlighted program to record, press REC.  
Pressing REC just once sets the program to record. Press   
REC repeatedly to change the frequency of the recording:  
•
•
Once – Just records the highlighted program  
Regularly – Records the same program any day it airs  
1
on the same channel at the same time  
45  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TV Guide On Screen™ System Operation  
10  
3
Highlight “set recording” then press ENTER.  
1
•
Weekly – Records the same program at the same time /  
day every week  
4
Set the recording options:  
• No record icon – Does not record.  
Press  
/
to highlight a field then press  
/
to change  
1
the setting.  
The program is recorded if it starts any time up to the midway  
• frequency – select whether the program will be  
recorded Once, Regularly (at the same time on the  
same channel), or Weekly (every week at the same  
time/day). The Off option adds the program to the  
recording schedule but doesn’t record it (you can set it  
to record later).  
point of the originally scheduled program. For example, up to  
9:15 for a 9:00 to 9:30 program.  
These recording options use the default settings.  
To record using settings other than the defaults, use the panel  
menu recording option described below.  
• start – set the start time of the recording to On time, or  
up to 120 minutes before or after the scheduled time.  
NOTE  
• When TV Guide On Screen™ is not being displayed, you can  
record a program simply by pressing the REC button on the  
remote control. Press the REC button to record the current  
program episode. Recording begins immediately. If the  
program is listed in the TV Guide On Screen™, recording  
stops at the end of the program. If the program is not listed  
in the TV Guide On Screen™ system, recording continues for  
30 minutes.  
• end – set the end time of the recording to On time, or  
up to 120 minutes before or after the scheduled time.  
• recorder – select a recorder to be used for recording.  
• If you want to cancel the recording, highlight cancel  
then press ENTER.  
5
Once all the settings have been made, press ENTER to  
highlight “schedule recording” then press ENTER again.  
• When TV Guide On Screen™ is not displayed, pressing the  
REC button more than once has no effect.  
Recording programs  
The simplest way to record a program is to highlight it then  
press REC (as described above). However, if you want to set  
the recording options to anything other than the default, use  
the Recording Options panel menu. Here you can adjust the  
start and end times, the destination of the recording, etc.  
1
From LISTINGS, SCHEDULE, or SEARCH, highlight the  
program you want to record.  
• The recording is now set (listed in SCHEDULE) and the  
appropriate icon appears on the show title.  
If there is a time conflict with a previously scheduled recording  
or auto-tune reminder, you will be alerted by one of the  
messages below. You can select to record the conflicting  
program, or cancel the recording.  
2
Press MENU to display the Episode Options menu.  
46  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TV Guide On Screen™ System Operation  
10  
When the recording is about to start  
Setting program reminders  
The TV Guide On Screen™ system alerts you when a scheduled  
recording is about to start and gives you the chance to cancel  
the recording.  
By setting a program reminder you can have the TV alert you  
when a program is about to start on another channel. You can  
set reminders for individual episodes, or for every time a  
program airs.  
When you see the on-screen alert, select the next action;  
• “change channel, start recording”  
1
From LISTINGS, SCHEDULE, or SEARCH, highlight the  
program.  
• “don’t change channel; cancel recording”  
Depending on the situation, the following screens may appear.  
Timer Alert  
The following timer is about to begin:  
Tues. 12/30 12:30am-12:59am  
Ant. A 1000.000 BRAV022  
A
D
Accept  
Cancel Timer  
Timer Alert  
PLASMA DISPLAY  
2
Press MENU to display the Episode Options menu.  
The following timer is about to begin:  
Wed. 1/5 4 : 06am- 9 : 08am  
Ant.  
A
1000. 5  
BRAV022  
D
A
Cancel Timer  
Accept  
Press A to start recording as scheduled or D to cancel  
recording.  
While recording is in progress  
If you attempt to change the channel during recording, the  
following screen appears.  
Select the next action:  
• “don’t change; keep recording”  
• “change; stop recording”  
3
4
Highlight “set reminder” then press ENTER.  
Set the reminder options.  
Press  
setting.  
/
to highlight a field; press  
/
to change the  
• frequency – select whether to be reminded just Once,  
Regularly (at the same time on the same channel), or  
Weekly (every week at the same time/day). The Off  
option adds the program to the reminder schedule but  
no reminder is given (to be set later).  
Depending on the situation, the following screens may appear.  
This reminder remains on-screen for 15 seconds.  
Recording In Progress  
Changing channels will interrupt a recording in progress.  
• auto tune – choose whether the TV should  
automatically change channels when a reminder is due.  
A
D
Change Channel Now  
Don't Change Channel  
• when – set when the reminder appears (before, on time,  
or after a program has started).  
REC  
Recording In Progress  
PLASMA DISPLAY  
Changing channels will interrupt a recording in progress.  
A
D
Change Channel Now  
Don't Change Channel  
Press A to change the channel and quit recording; or press D  
not to change the channel and to continue recording.  
47  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TV Guide On Screen™ System Operation  
10  
Depending on the situation, the following screens may appear.  
The reminder remains on-screen for 15 seconds.  
5
Once all the settings have been made, press ENTER to  
highlight “schedule reminder”, then press ENTER again.  
Timer Alert  
Tues. 12/30 12:30am-12:59am  
Ant. A 1000.000 BRAV022  
A
D
Accept  
Cancel Timer  
Timer Alert  
PLASMA DISPLAY  
Wed. 1/5 4 : 06am- 9 : 08am  
Ant.  
A
1000. 5  
BRAV022  
D
A
Cancel Timer  
Accept  
• The reminder is now set (listed in SCHEDULE) and the  
appropriate icon appears on the show title.  
Press A to leave the reminder in effect, or D to dismiss the  
reminder.  
If there is a time conflict with a previously scheduled auto-tune  
reminder or recording, you will be alerted. One of the  
messages below will appear. You can select to set a reminder  
for the conflicting program or cancel the reminder.  
When scheduled reminder is due (auto-tune is ON)  
If the “auto-tune” setting was set to “yes” in the Remind  
Options, one of the following screens appears, depending on  
the situation.  
The screen remains visible for 15 seconds.  
Timer Alert  
Tues. 12/30 12:30am-12:59am  
Ant. A 1000.000 BRAV022  
A
Accept  
Timer Alert  
PLASMA DISPLAY  
Wed. 1/5 4 : 06am- 9 : 08am  
Ant.  
A
1000. 5  
BRAV022  
A
Accept  
Press A to make the Timer Alert screen disappear.  
When a scheduled reminder is due (auto-tune is OFF)  
Depending on your settings, the reminder will appear on your  
TV screen shortly before the program is scheduled to start. This  
happens when you have selected “NO” for the auto tune. The  
reminder remains on-screen for three minutes before it  
automatically disappears.  
Press ENTER to switch to the highlighted program in the  
reminder or highlight “hide reminders” to dismiss the reminder.  
If more than one reminder is set for the same time, press  
to select which program to watch.  
/
48  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TV Guide On Screen™ System Operation  
10  
4
Press ENTER to list upcoming programs that match the  
categories you chose.  
Searching for programs  
The Search screen lets you search for programs alphabetically,  
by category, or by keyword. You can also search for HDTV  
programs.  
Searching by category  
This option supports searching for programs by category, and  
then by a further sub-category.  
1
Select “SEARCH” from the Service bar at the top of the  
screen.  
2
Press to move to the search category bar, then press  
/
to select a search category.  
5
Highlight a program listing then press MENU to display  
the Episode Options menu.  
• Available categories may include:  
• If the program is currently showing, press ENTER to start  
watching it immediately.  
• Movies  
• Sports  
• Children  
• Educational  
• News  
• Variety  
• Series  
• HDTV  
3
Press to highlight the search sub-categories then select  
a sub-category.  
• Sub-categories availability depends upon the category  
you choose.  
49  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TV Guide On Screen™ System Operation  
10  
7
Input the keyword for the search.  
Searching by keyword  
This option supports searching for shows based on keywords  
you enter. The keywords you create are stored so you can use  
them again.  
1
Select “SEARCH” from the Service bar at the top of the  
screen.  
2
Press to move to the search category bar, then press  
/
to select “KEYWORD”.  
• Highlight characters by pressing  
/
/
/
, then press  
ENTER to input the letter or number.  
• The new keyword is stored for future searches.  
Select “DONE” to start the search process.  
8
9
Highlight a program listing, then press MENU to display  
the Episode Options menu.  
• Previously entered keywords are displayed. Simply  
select one to search for it again.  
• To edit or delete a keyword, highlight it then press  
MENU. From the panel menu you can choose “edit  
search” or “delete search”.  
3
Press ENTER to display the Keyword Search menu.  
• If the program is currently showing, press ENTER to start  
watching it immediately.  
4
5
Select “new search”.  
If you want to change the category, scroll up to select the  
category you want.  
• To search using only the keyword, leave the category set  
to “All”.  
• If you select a category (“HDTV”, for example) then you’ll  
only see programs in that category that also match the  
keyword.  
6
Highlight “enter keyword” then press ENTER.  
50  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TV Guide On Screen™ System Operation  
10  
Alphabetical search  
This search is designed to display all programs that start with  
a particular letter.  
The search Episode Options menu  
From the Episode Options menu you can select:  
• go to Service bar – closes the panel menu and returns to  
the Service bar at the top of the screen  
• tune to channel / watch now – exits the TV Guide On  
Screen™ guide and tunes to the channel  
• set recording – goes to the Record Options menu  
• set reminder – goes to the Remind Options menu  
1
Select “SEARCH” from the Service bar at the top of the  
screen.  
2
Press to move to the search category bar, then press  
/
to select “ALPHABETICAL”.  
• cancel – closes the panel menu and returns to the  
highlighted program  
Navigation and search tips  
• The  
/
buttons move the highlight between options in the  
menu. Use the number buttons to input information.  
• If a highlighted field has arrows on either side, press  
cycle through the options.  
/
to  
• Press ENTER on any option to highlight the default  
command (e.g., Done) then press ENTER again to execute  
and close the menu.  
3
4
Press ENTER.  
• Select Cancel then press ENTER to close the menu and  
return to the previous screen, or press MENU to close the  
menu without saving the changes.  
Select a letter, then press ENTER to display all programs  
starting with that letter.  
5
Highlight a program then press MENU to display the  
Episode Options menu.  
• If the program is currently showing, press ENTER to start  
watching it immediately.  
51  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TV Guide On Screen™ System Operation  
10  
2
Highlight a program in the list then press MENU to display  
the Schedule Options menu.  
Scheduling recordings and reminders  
From the Schedule area you can review, edit or delete future  
recording sessions and reminders.  
1
Select “SCHEDULE” from the Service bar at the top of the  
screen.  
• Highlight a program in the list to see information related  
to that program (data appears in the Info Box).  
The Schedule Options menu  
Programs marked for reminding or to be recorded (referred to  
as scheduled ‘events’) are listed. The icon on the right  
indicates the status of the event.  
Press MENU with either “SCHEDULE” (in the Service bar) or a  
program highlighted to access the Schedule Options menu.  
When “SCHEDULE” is highlighted in the service bar:  
• go to Service Bar – closes the menu and returns to the  
•
•
Once only recording  
Service bar at the top of the screen  
• sort by – select a sort order for the program listings  
• new manual recording – select then fill in the necessary  
fields to set the recording  
Select “schedule recording” to save and exit or select “cancel”  
to exit without saving.  
Daily Records the same channel and time every  
Monday through Friday (manual recording only)  
•
Regularly – Records the same program any day it airs  
on the same channel at the same time  
1
• new manual reminder – select and then fill in all the  
necessary fields to set the reminder. Select “schedule  
reminder” when you’re done to save and exit, or select  
“cancel” to exit without saving.  
• done – closes the menu and returns to the Service bar at the  
top of the screen  
• cancel – closes the menu without saving changes and  
returns to the Service bar at the top of the screen  
When a program is highlighted:  
•
•
Weekly recording (every week at the same time/day)  
Record Suspend – The program is set to record, but is  
suspended because of a conflict with another recording or  
auto tune reminder. The recording resumes when the  
conflict is cleared.  
•
Off: The program remains in the SCHEDULE list, but is  
not recorded.  
• go to Service Bar – closes the menu and returns to the  
•
•
Once only reminder  
Service bar at the top of the screen  
• watch now – selected program appears (this option is “tune  
to channel” for a future program)  
• cancel – closes the menu and returns to the highlighted  
program listing  
Daily Reminds for the same channel and time every  
Monday through Friday (manual reminder only)  
•
Regularly – Reminds the same program any day it airs  
on the same channel at the same time  
2
For recording:  
• set recording – set the program to record (opens the Record  
Options menu)  
•
•
Weekly reminder (every week at the same time/day)  
• delete recording – remove the recording from the schedule  
(requires confirmation)  
• edit recording – edit the recording settings (opens the  
Record Options menu)  
Remind Suspend – A reminder is set for the program,  
but is suspended because of a conflict with another auto  
tune reminder or recording. The reminder activates when the  
conflict is cleared.  
For reminder:  
• set reminder – set a reminder notice for the program (opens  
•
Off: The program remains in the SCHEDULE list but the  
the Remind Options menu)  
reminder is not sent.  
• delete reminder – remove the reminder from the schedule  
(requires confirmation)  
• edit reminder – edit the reminder settings (opens the  
Remind Options menu)  
1
The program records if it starts any time up to the midway  
point of the originally scheduled program. For example, up to  
9:15 for a 9:00 to 9:30 program.  
2
The reactivated reminder appears if the program starts any  
time up to the midway point of the original schedule. For  
example, up to 9:15 for a 9:00 to 9:30 program.  
52  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TV Guide On Screen™ System Operation  
10  
2
Press ENTER to display the current settings and the  
options to change them.  
Changing setup options  
You can change TV Guide On Screen™ settings from the Setup  
menu. Setup options are divided into three categories: System  
Settings, Channel Display, and Default Options.  
1
Select “SETUP” from the Service bar at the top of the  
screen.  
3
Select one of the options, then follow the on-screen  
instructions.  
• Yes, everything is correct (displays a helpful information  
screen). Press ENTER to quit the TV Guide On Screen™  
System.  
• Yes, but my channel lineup is incorrect (displays a  
screen with alternate channel lineups). Press ENTER to  
display the Channel Editor screen.  
2
Press to select a Setup option.  
• No, repeat setup process (displays Screen 1 shown on  
page 30).  
Changing the Channel Display settings  
From the Channel Display settings you can set/change:  
• the display setting to always display (On), never display (Off),  
or display only when channel information is available (Auto  
Hide)  
• the tuned channel number  
• the channel position in the channel listing  
Adjustment options appear with each highlighted menu  
item.  
• System Settings – ZIP/postal code, cable setup, etc.  
1
Highlight the “Change Channel Display” item.  
• Channel Display – Channel position, tuning channel,  
display on/off, etc.  
• Default Options – General, recording and reminder  
defaults  
Changing the System Settings  
The System Settings include your ZIP/postal code and your  
cable TV setup.  
1
Highlight the “Change System Settings” item.  
2
Press ENTER to display the channel editor.  
53  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TV Guide On Screen™ System Operation  
10  
3
Press  
/
to highlight a channel then press ENTER to go  
Changing the Default Options  
The menu provides options to change the default settings for  
recordings, reminders, and other general settings.  
to the Grid Options menu.  
1
Select the “Change Default Options” item.  
From the Grid Options menu you can set:  
• channel – On (display in channel list), Off (don’t display)  
or Auto Hide (hide when no program information is  
available)  
• service – the type of service that the channel operates  
on (cable, etc.)  
2
Select a default option category.  
A different panel menu appears for each option.  
• tune channel – the channel number that the channel  
General default options  
box size – the initial size of the Info Box (no, small,  
listing is tuned to  
• position – place that the channel appears in the  
channel list  
•
large, last used)  
4
After making all selections for the channel, highlight  
“done” then press ENTER.  
• box cycle – the cycle behavior of the Info Box (no only, small  
only, large only, no & small, no & large, small & large, all)  
• auto guide – Display TV Guide On Screen™ guide  
automatically when you turn on the TV  
• To cancel without saving the changes, select “cancel”.  
Record defaults  
• start – when to start a recording (up to 120 minutes earlier  
or later than the program start time, or On time)  
• end – when to end a recording (up to 120 minutes earlier or  
later than the program end time, or On time)  
• recorder – selects a recorder to be used for recording.  
Remind defaults  
• auto tune – automatically tunes to the correct channel  
when a reminder becomes due (Yes or No)  
• when – set the display time for the reminder (15 minutes  
early to 15 minutes late, or On time)  
3
When the settings are complete, highlight “done” then  
press ENTER.  
• To cancel without saving the changes, select “cancel”.  
54  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustments and Settings  
Adjustments and Settings  
11  
For AV source  
Sleep Timer  
When the selected time elapses, the Sleep Timer automatically  
places the system into standby.  
Item  
Description  
STANDARD  
For a highly defined image in a normally bright  
room  
This selection is shared by the external input and  
TV input sources.  
Press SLEEP to select the desired time.  
• The timer starts counting.  
• Each time you press SLEEP, the selection cycles as below:  
DYNAMIC  
For a very sharp image with maximum contrast  
This mode does not allow manual image quality  
adjustment.  
30  
60  
90  
This selection is shared by the external input and  
TV input sources.  
Off  
120  
(cancel)  
(minutes)  
MOVIE  
GAME  
PURE  
For movies  
This selection is shared by the external input and  
TV input sources.  
• The factory default is “Off”.  
NOTE  
Lowers image brightness for easier viewing  
This selection is shared by the external input and  
TV input sources  
• To cancel the Sleep Timer, select “Off” by pressing SLEEP.  
• Five minutes before the selected time elapses, the remaining  
time appears every minute.  
Reflects input signals as faithfully as possible  
For example, you may select this option to check  
image materials.  
You can also use this menu to set the Sleep Timer.  
USER  
Allows you to customize settings as desired  
You can set the mode for each input source.  
1
2
3
4
Press HOME MENU.  
Select “Sleep Timer”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu.  
Select the desired time. (  
/
For PC source  
Item  
Description  
STANDARD  
USER  
For a highly defined image in a normally bright room  
AV Selection  
Allows you to customize settings as desired  
You can set the mode for each input source.  
Viewing options depend upon the current environment (e.g.,  
room brightness), the type of the current TV program, or the  
type of images input from external equipment. To change the  
view, follow the directions below.  
5
Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu.  
NOTE  
1
Press AV SELECTION.  
• You can also press AV SELECTION on the remote control  
unit to change the viewing option.  
• Selecting the DYNAMIC viewing setting causes all other  
viewing options to become unavailable (grayed out).  
• The current AV Selection mode appears.  
2
Press AV SELECTION again before the displayed mode  
disappears.  
• For AV source, the mode cycles in this order;  
STANDARD, DYNAMIC, MOVIE, GAME, PURE and  
USER.  
• For PC source, the mode toggles between STANDARD  
and USER.  
You can also use the menu to change the options.  
1
2
3
4
Press HOME MENU.  
Select “Picture”. (  
Select “AV Selection”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
/
Select the desired option. (  
AV Selection  
/
STANDARD  
DYNAMIC  
MOVIE  
GAME  
PURE  
USER  
55  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustments and Settings  
Basic picture adjustments  
11  
For PC source, the following screen appears:  
Picture  
Adjust the picture to your preference unless DYNAMIC was  
selected. The DYNAMIC setting automatically adjusts the  
image.  
AV Selection  
Contrast  
Brightness  
Red  
STANDARD  
40  
0
1
2
3
Press HOME MENU.  
Select “Picture”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
0
Select an item to be adjusted. (  
/
then ENTER)  
Green  
0
Blue  
0
Picture  
Reset  
AV Selection  
Contrast  
Brightness  
Color  
STANDARD  
40  
0
NOTE  
0
• To perform advanced picture adjustments, select “Pro  
Adjust” in step 3 then press ENTER. For the subsequent  
procedures see “Advanced picture adjustments” on page 57.  
Tint  
0
Sharpness  
Pro Adjust  
Reset  
0
• To restore the factory defaults for all items, press  
highlight “Reset” in step 3 then press ENTER. A confirmation  
screen appears. Press  
ENTER.  
/
to  
/
to select “Yes” then press  
4
5
Select the desired level. (  
/
)
Contrast  
40  
• When an adjustment screen is displayed, you can also  
press to change the item to be adjusted.  
/
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.  
For AV source  
Item  
button  
button  
Contrast  
Brightness  
Color  
For less contrast  
For more contrast  
For more brightness  
For more color intensity  
For less brightness  
For less color intensity  
Tint  
Skin tones become  
purplish  
Skin tones become  
greenish  
Sharpness  
For less sharpness  
For more sharpness  
For PC source  
Item  
button  
button  
Contrast  
Brightness  
Red  
For less contrast  
For less brightness  
For weaker red  
For more contrast  
For more brightness  
For stronger red  
For stronger green  
For stronger blue  
Green  
For weaker green  
For weaker blue  
Blue  
56  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustments and Settings  
Advanced picture adjustments  
11  
Using Color Temp  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press HOME MENU.  
The Plasma Display System provides various advanced  
functions for optimizing the picture quality. For details on these  
functions, see the following tables.  
Select “Picture”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
/ then ENTER)  
Select “Pro Adjust”. (  
Select “Color Detail”. (  
Select “Color Temp”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
Using PureCinema  
1
2
3
4
5
Press HOME MENU.  
/
then ENTER)  
Select “Picture”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
• For the selectable parameters, refer to the table below.  
Select the desired parameter. (  
/
then ENTER)  
• If you have selected a desired parameter in this step,  
skip steps 7 and 8.  
• An option is to apply a fine adjustment. To do this, select  
“Manual” first and then press and hold ENTER for at  
least three (3) seconds. The manual adjustment screen  
appears. Continue to step 7.  
Select “Pro Adjust”. (  
Select “PureCinema”. (  
/
/
Select the desired parameter. (  
/
PureCinema  
Color Temp  
Adjusts the color temperature, resulting in a better white balance.  
Automatically detects a film-based source (originally encoded at 24  
frames/second), analyzes it, then recreates each still film frame for high-  
definition picture quality.  
Selections  
High  
White with bluish tone  
Selections  
Off  
Deactivates the PureCinema.  
Mid-High  
Mid  
Intermediate tone between High and Mid  
Natural tone  
Standard  
Produces smooth and vivid moving  
images (film specific) by automatically  
detecting recorded image information  
when displaying DVD or high-definition  
images (e.g., movies) having 24 frames  
per second.  
Mid-Low  
Low  
Intermediate tone between Mid and Low  
White with reddish tone  
Manual  
Color temperature adjusted to your  
preference  
ADV  
Produces smooth and quality moving  
images (as shown on theatre screens) by  
converting to 72 Hz when displaying DVD  
images (e.g., movies) having 24 frames  
per second.  
7
8
Select an item to be adjusted. (  
Select the desired level. (  
/
then ENTER)  
/
)
Item  
button  
For weaker red  
button  
R High  
G High  
B High  
R Low  
G Low  
B Low  
For stronger red  
For stronger green  
For stronger blue  
For stronger red  
For stronger green  
For stronger blue  
NOTE  
Fine adjustment for  
bright portions  
For weaker green  
For weaker blue  
For weaker red  
For weaker green  
For weaker blue  
• “Standard” is unavailable for 480p or 720p@60 Hz or  
1080p@24 Hz (HDMI) signals.  
• “ADV” is unavailable for 1080p@24 Hz (HDMI) signals.  
Fine adjustment for  
dark portions  
• To adjust another item, press RETURN, then repeat  
steps 7 and 8.  
• Press  
/
to select another item for adjustment.  
9
Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu.  
57  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustments and Settings  
11  
Using CTI  
Using Color Space  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press HOME MENU.  
1
2
3
4
5
Press HOME MENU.  
Select “Picture”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
Select “Picture”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
/ then ENTER)  
Select “Pro Adjust”. (  
Select “Color Detail”. (  
Select “Color Space”. (  
Select “Pro Adjust”. (  
Select “Color Detail”. (  
/
/
then ENTER)  
/
/
then ENTER)  
Select “CTI”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
6
Select the desired parameter. (  
/
then ENTER)  
Select the desired parameter. (  
/
then ENTER)  
CTI  
Color Space  
Changes the color reproduction space.  
Color Transient Improvement (CTI) provides images with clearer color  
contours.  
Selections  
1
Optimized for vivid, vibrant color  
reproduction  
Selections  
Off  
On  
Deactivates CTI  
Activates CTI  
2
Standard color reproduction  
7
Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu.  
7
Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu.  
Using Color Management  
Using Intelligent Color  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press HOME MENU.  
Select “Picture”. (  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press HOME MENU.  
Select “Picture”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
/
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
Select “Pro Adjust”. (  
Select “Color Detail”. (  
/
Select “Pro Adjust”. (  
Select “Color Detail”. (  
/
/
/
Select “Intelligent Color”. (  
/
Select “Color Management”. (  
Select an item to be adjusted. (  
/
then ENTER)  
Select the desired parameter. (  
/
/
then ENTER)  
Intelligent Color  
Color Management  
Intelligent Color (IC) automatically selects the optimum color tones for an  
image.  
R
Y
0
0
0
0
0
0
Selections  
Off  
On  
Deactivates Intelligent Color  
Activates Intelligent Color  
G
C
B
M
7
Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu.  
7
Select the desired level. (  
/
)
Item  
button  
button  
R
Closer to magenta  
Closer to red  
Closer to yellow  
Closer to green  
Closer to cyan  
Closer to blue  
Closer to magenta  
Closer to red  
Y
G
C
Closer to yellow  
Closer to green  
Closer to cyan  
Closer to blue  
B
M
• To adjust another item, press RETURN then repeat steps  
6 and 7.  
• Press  
/
to select another item for adjustment.  
8
Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu.  
58  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustments and Settings  
11  
Eliminating noise from images  
Using the Dynamic Range Expander (DRE)  
functions  
1
2
3
4
5
Press HOME MENU.  
Select “Picture”. (  
Select “Pro Adjust”. (  
Select “NR”. ( then ENTER)  
Select an item to be adjusted. (  
• Choose “DNR”, “MPEG NR” or “BNR”.  
Select the desired parameter. ( then ENTER)  
1
2
3
4
5
Press HOME MENU.  
Select “Picture”. (  
Select “Pro Adjust”. (  
Select “DRE”. ( then ENTER)  
Select an item to be adjusted. (  
/
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
/
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
/
/
/
/
/
then ENTER)  
/
then ENTER)  
• Choose “Dynamic Contrast”, “Black Level”, “ACL”,  
“Gamma” or “Intelligent DRE”.  
6
/
DNR  
6
Select the desired parameter. (  
/
then ENTER)  
Digital Noise Reduction (DNR) eliminates video noise for clean, crisp  
images.  
Dynamic Contrast  
Selections  
Off  
Deactivates DNR  
Enhanced DNR  
Standard DNR  
Moderate DNR  
Dynamic Contrast (DC) emphasizes image contrast so that the difference  
between bright and dark areas become more distinct.  
High  
Mid  
Low  
Selections  
Off  
Deactivates Dynamic Contrast  
Enhanced Dynamic Contrast  
Standard Dynamic Contrast  
Moderate Dynamic Contrast  
High  
Mid  
Low  
MPEG NR  
MPEG NR, video noise reduction for MPEG-encoded content, eliminates  
mosquito noise (tiny irregularities in the image) from video when a DVD is  
played. The result is a noise-free image.  
Black Level  
Black Level (BL) emphasizes the dark portions of images so that the  
difference between bright and dark areas become more distinct.  
Selections  
Off  
Deactivates MPEG NR  
Enhanced MPEG NR  
Standard MPEG NR  
Moderate MPEG NR  
High  
Mid  
Low  
Selections  
Off  
On  
Deactivates Black Level  
Activates Black Level  
ACL  
BNR  
Automatic Contrast Limiter (ACL) automatically selects the optimum  
contrast for an image.  
Block Noise Reduction (BNR) helps reduce mosquito noise appearing in  
high-definition images.  
Selections  
Off  
On  
Deactivates ACL  
Activates ACL  
Selections  
Off  
On  
Deactivates BNR  
Activates BNR  
Gamma  
7
Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu.  
Gamma adjusts the image gradation characteristics.  
Selections  
1
2
3
Selects gamma characteristics 1  
Selects gamma characteristics 2  
Selects gamma characteristics 3  
Intelligent DRE  
Intelligent Dynamic Range Expander (DRE) optimizes the image quality.  
Selections  
Off  
On  
Deactivates Intelligent DRE  
Activates Intelligent DRE  
7
Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu.  
59  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustments and Settings  
11  
Using the 3DYC and I-P Mode  
Sound adjustments  
1
2
3
4
5
Press HOME MENU.  
Select “Picture”. (  
Select “Pro Adjust”. (  
Select “Others”. (  
Adjust the sound to your preference. See page 55.  
/
then ENTER)  
1
2
3
4
Press HOME MENU.  
Select “Sound”. (  
Select an item to be adjusted. (  
/
then ENTER)  
/
then ENTER)  
/
then ENTER)  
/
)
Select an item to be adjusted. (  
• Choose “3DYC” or “I-P Mode”.  
/
then ENTER)  
Select the desired level. (  
/
)
Sound STANDARD  
6
Select the desired parameter. (  
/
then ENTER)  
Treble  
2
3DYC  
Bass  
0
0
3DYC optimizes characteristics for separating brightness signals and  
color signals. This works for both video and still images.  
Balance  
Reset  
Selections  
Off  
Deactivates 3DYC  
Enhanced 3DYC  
Standard 3DYC  
Moderate 3DYC  
FOCUS  
Front Surround  
Off  
Off  
High  
Mid  
Low  
Item  
Treble  
button  
button  
I-P Mode  
For weaker treble  
For weaker bass  
For stronger treble  
For stronger bass  
I-P Mode optimizes conversion from interlace signals to progressive  
signals. This works for both video and still images.  
Bass  
Selections  
1
2
3
Optimum for video images  
Standard setting  
Balance  
Decreases audio from the Decreases audio from the  
right speaker left speaker  
Optimum for still images  
5
Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu.  
7
Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu.  
NOTE  
NOTE  
• To restore all factory defaults, press  
step 3 then press ENTER. A confirmation screen appears.  
Press to select “Yes” then press ENTER.  
/
to select “Reset” in  
• In I-P Mode, the individual parameters are unavailable for  
480p and 720p@60 Hz signals.  
/
60  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustments and Settings  
11  
FOCUS  
Power Control  
Power Control provides convenient power saving options.  
Focus shifts the sound-source direction (sound image) upward  
and produces clear sound contours.  
1
2
3
4
Press HOME MENU.  
Energy Save  
There are three Energy Save modes to reduce power  
consumption.  
Select “Sound”. (  
Select “FOCUS”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
/
)
1
2
3
4
Press HOME MENU.  
Select “Power Control”. (  
Select “Energy Save”. (  
Select the desired parameter. (  
/
)
/
then ENTER)  
Item  
Off  
On  
Description  
/
then ENTER)  
Deactivates FOCUS  
Activates FOCUS  
Select “Save1”, “Save2” or “Picture Off”. (  
ENTER)  
/
then  
Item  
Standard  
Description  
5
Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu.  
Maximum picture brightness; may increase glass  
panel buzzing  
Front Surround  
Front Surround provides three-dimensional sound effects and/  
or a deep, rich bass.  
Save1  
Slightly reduced power consumption and brightness;  
optimal setting for most uses  
Save2  
Lowest power consumption; slightly decreased  
brightness  
1
2
3
4
Press HOME MENU.  
Select “Sound”. (  
Select “Front Surround”. (  
Select the desired parameter. (  
Picture Off  
Deactivates the screen to save power. To restore the  
screen display, press any button other than VOL +/–  
and MUTING.  
/
then ENTER)  
/
)
This setting is not memorized by the system.  
/
)
Item  
Off  
Description  
5
Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu.  
NOTE  
Deactivates both SRS and TruBass  
SRS  
Reproduces highly effective three-dimensional sound  
Provides deep, rich bass using a new technology  
TruBass  
(factory default)  
• When the signal is coming from a PC, use the Home menu  
to set this option.  
TruBass + SRS  
Provides both TruBass and SRS effects  
No Signal off (AV mode only)  
The system automatically enters Standby if no signal is  
received for 15 minutes.  
5
Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu.  
NOTE  
(WOW) FOCUS is on and TruBass + SRS is selected  
1
2
3
4
Press HOME MENU.  
Select “Power Control”. (  
Select “No Signal off”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
•
•
/
then ENTER)  
for Front Surround  
Select “Enable”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
trademark of SRS Labs, Inc.  
• WOW technology is incorporated under license from SRS  
Labs, Inc.  
Item  
Description  
Disable  
Does not place the system into Standby  
(factory default)  
Enable  
Places the system into Standby if no signal is  
received for 15 minutes  
5
Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu.  
NOTE  
• Five minutes before the system is placed into Standby, a  
message appears as each minute counts down.  
• The system may not enter Standby if the TV program signal  
has a high video noise level.  
61  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustments and Settings  
11  
No Operation off (AV mode only)  
The system automatically enters Standby when no operation is  
performed for three hours.  
Image position adjustment  
(AV mode only)  
This function adjusts an image’s horizontal/vertical position on  
the Plasma Display.  
1
2
3
4
Press HOME MENU.  
Select “Power Control”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
1
2
3
4
Press HOME MENU.  
Select “No Operation off”. (  
Select “Enable”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
Select “Option”. (  
Select “Position”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
/
then ENTER)  
/
then ENTER)  
Select “H/V Position Adjust”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
Item  
Description  
Disable  
(factory default)  
Does not place the system into Standby  
Position  
H/V Position Adjust  
Reset  
Enable  
Places the system into Standby if no operation is  
performed for three hours  
5
Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu.  
5
6
Adjust the vertical position (  
/
) or horizontal position  
(
/
).  
NOTE  
Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu.  
• Five minutes before the system is placed into Standby, a  
message appears as each minute counts down.  
NOTE  
• To restore the factory defaults, press  
in step 4 then press ENTER. A confirmation screen appears.  
Press to select “Yes” then press ENTER.  
• Adjustments are stored separately for each input source.  
• Depending on the displayed video, the image position may  
not change even after adjustment.  
/
to select “Reset”  
Power Management (PC mode only)  
The system automatically enters Standby when no signal is  
received from the PC.  
/
1
2
3
4
Press HOME MENU.  
Select “Power Control”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
Select “Power Management”. (  
Select “Mode1” or “Mode2”. (  
/
/
Automatic image position and clock  
(Hertz) adjustments (PC mode only)  
Use Auto Setup to automatically adjust image positions and  
clock speeds when coming from a PC.  
Item  
Description  
No power management  
Off  
(factory default)  
Mode1  
1
2
3
Press HOME MENU.  
Select “Option”. (  
• Places the system into Standby when no signal is  
received from the PC for eight minutes  
/
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
• Although the PC is accessed and a signal is  
received again, the system stays off.  
• Press STANDBY/ON on the Plasma Display or TV  
on the remote control to turn the panel On  
Select “Auto Setup”. (  
/
Option  
Mode2  
• Places the system into Standby when no signal is  
received for eight seconds  
• Access the PC (a signal is received again), the  
system turns On  
Auto Setup  
Manual Setup  
• Press STANDBY/ON on the Plasma Display or TV  
on the remote control to turn the panel On.  
• Auto Setup begins.  
4
Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu.  
5
Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu.  
NOTE  
• When Auto Setup is finished, “Auto Setup completed.”  
appears.  
• Although “Auto Setup completed.” appears, Auto Setup may  
have failed, depending on conditions.  
• Auto Setup may fail with a PC image composed of similar  
patterns or a monochrome picture. If Auto Setup fails,  
change the PC image and try again.  
• The PC and the Plasma Display must be turned On before  
starting Auto Setup.  
62  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustments and Settings  
11  
Manual image position and clock  
adjustments (PC mode only)  
Selecting a screen size manually  
In single-screen mode, press SCREEN SIZE to change the size  
of the screen. The Video signal determines the available screen  
size options.  
Usually you can easily adjust the positions and clock of images  
using Auto Setup. Use Manual Setup to optimize the positions  
and clock of images when necessary.  
• The selectable screen sizes differ depending on the type of  
input signal.  
1
2
3
4
Press HOME MENU.  
Select “Option”. (  
Select “Manual Setup”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
AV mode  
/
Item  
Description  
Select an item to be adjusted. (  
/
then ENTER)  
4:3  
For 4:3 “standard” pictures (side bar appears on each  
side)  
Manual Setup  
FULL  
For 16:9 squeezed pictures  
H/V Position Adjust  
Clock  
ZOOM  
For 16:9 letterbox pictures (bars may appear on the top  
and bottom on some programs)  
0
0
Phase  
CINEMA  
WIDE  
For 14:9 letterbox pictures (bars may appear on the top  
and bottom on some programs)  
Reset  
In this mode pictures are stretched to fill the screen,  
side to side  
5
6
Perform adjustment. (  
• With “Clock” or “Phase” selected, you can change the  
parameter using  
/
or  
/
)
NOTE  
/
.
• Avoid displaying signals that do not completely fill the  
screen. This may cause temporary or permanent image  
retention depending on the frequency and duration.  
Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu.  
NOTE  
PC mode except for XGA signals  
• To restore all factory defaults, press  
step 4 then press ENTER. A confirmation screen appears.  
Press to select “Yes” then press ENTER.  
/
to select “Reset” in  
Item  
Description  
/
4:3  
Fills the screen without altering the input signal aspect  
ratio  
FULL  
Full 16:9 screen display  
Dot by Dot  
Matches input signal to the same number of screen  
pixels  
PC mode for XGA signals  
(Ex. 1024 × 768 input with PRO-1140HD)  
Item  
Description  
4:3  
Matches input signal to the same number of screen  
pixels  
Optimized for 1024 × 768 display  
FULL1  
FULL2  
Full 16:9 screen display  
Optimized for 1024 × 768 display  
For wide signal display  
Use when displaying 1360 × 768 signal resolution  
NOTE  
• In 2-screen mode, press SCREEN SIZE to change the size of  
the left screen.  
• For the PRO-940HD the number of panel pixels is different.  
Signal processing and actual viewing conditions vary  
slightly.  
63  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustments and Settings  
11  
• When watching a High Definition TV broadcast, press  
SCREEN SIZE to cycle through FULL, ZOOM, WIDE, and 4:3.  
Selecting a screen size automatically  
• High Definition TV broadcasting with WIDE selected may  
hide some of the screen image. If this is the case, select  
FULL.  
• Some HD broadcasts may display 4:3 content with side  
masks. Extended viewing with the sides masked can cause  
uneven wear. After viewing 4:3 content, try watching a  
program in full screen motion video.  
The Plasma Display automatically selects an appropriate  
screen size when video signals are received from a connected  
HDMI device (see page 67). To activate this function, use the  
following procedure.  
1
2
3
4
Press HOME MENU.  
Select “Option”. (  
Select “Auto Size”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
/
AV mode  
Select “On”. (  
/
Auto Size  
4:3  
Off  
On  
Item  
Description  
WIDE  
FULL  
Off  
Deactivates the Auto Size function  
(factory default)  
On  
Activates the Auto Size function  
5
Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu.  
CINEMA  
ZOOM  
NOTE  
• Manually select an appropriate screen size if an image does  
not automatically switch to the correct screen format.  
• When the video signal contains no aspect ratio information,  
automatic screen sizing is unavailable.  
PC mode except for XGA signals  
Selecting a screen size for 4:3 aspect ratio  
signals  
4:3  
With the Auto Size function activated, choose whether the  
Plasma Display should choose the 4:3 mode or WIDE mode  
when 4:3 aspect ratio signals are received.  
Dot by  
Dot  
FULL  
1
2
3
4
Press HOME MENU.  
Select “Option”. (  
Select “4:3 Mode”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
/
then ENTER)  
PC mode for XGA signals  
Select “WIDE” or “4:3”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
4:3 Mode  
4:3  
WIDE  
4:3  
Item  
Description  
FULL2  
FULL1  
WIDE  
Wide image without side masks  
(factory default)  
4:3  
4:3 aspect ratio with side masks  
NOTE  
• The selectable screen sizes may differ depending on the  
conditions.  
WIDE  
4:3  
5
Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu.  
64  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustments and Settings  
11  
Changing the brightness on both sides  
of the screen (Side Mask)  
Language setting  
To change the language being used for on-screen displays  
(such as menus in French or Spanish instead of English),  
follow the instructions below.  
With the 4:3 screen size selected for the AV mode, you can  
change the brightness of the gray vertical bars (side masks)  
that appear on the sides of the screen.  
1
2
3
4
Press HOME MENU.  
Select “Option”. (  
1
2
3
4
Press HOME MENU.  
Select “Option”. (  
Select “Side Mask”. (  
Select the desired parameter. (  
/
then ENTER)  
/ then ENTER)  
/
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
Select “Language”. (  
Select a language. (  
/
/
)
/
Language  
Menu  
Item  
Description  
Always sets the same brightness for the gray side  
English  
Fixed  
(factory default) masks  
Auto Adjusts the brightness of the gray side masks  
according to the brightness of images  
5
Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu.  
5
Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu.  
NOTE  
• Displaying pictures in 4:3 screen mode for an extended  
period may cause an after-image. View another program at  
full screen afterwards to avoid this issue.  
65  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using External Equipment  
Using External Equipment  
12  
Displaying a DVD image  
About External Equipment  
To watch a DVD image, press INPUT 2 on the remote control  
You can connect many types of devices to your Plasma Display  
System. Some examples are a DVD player, VCR, PC, game  
console, or camcorder.  
unit or press INPUT on the Plasma Display to select INPUT2.  
NOTE  
To view images coming from external equipment, select the  
input source using the INPUT buttons on the remote control or  
the INPUT button on the Plasma Display.  
• Refer to your DVD player instruction manual for the signal  
type.  
• The INPUT 2 terminals are checked whether they are  
connected in the following order; 1) Component Video, 2) S-  
Video, 3) Video.  
CAUTION  
• To protect equipment, always unplug the Plasma Display  
from the power outlet before adding to a DVD player, VCR,  
PC, game console, camcorder, or other device.  
Use the desired connection for viewing.  
• Connect external equipment to only terminals that are to be  
actually used.  
NOTE  
• Refer to the device’s operating instructions (DVD player, PC,  
etc.) before connecting the equipment.  
Watching a VCR image  
Connecting a VCR  
Use the INPUT 1 terminals when connecting a VCR or other  
audio/visual equipment.  
Watching a DVD image  
Plasma Display (rear view)  
Connecting a DVD player  
Use the INPUT 2 terminals when connecting a DVD player or  
other audio/visual equipment.  
S-Video cable  
(sold separately)  
Plasma Display (rear view)  
AV cable  
(sold separately)  
S-Video cable  
(sold separately)  
AV cable  
(sold separately)  
Component Video cable  
(sold separately)  
VCR  
Displaying a VCR image  
To watch a VCR image, press INPUT 1 on the remote control  
unit or press INPUT on the Plasma Display to select INPUT1.  
DVD player  
NOTE  
• INPUT 1 checks for S-Video connections first then for Video.  
Use the desired connection for viewing.  
66  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using External Equipment  
Using HDMI Input  
The INPUT 5 and INPUT 6 terminals are HDMI terminals for  
digital video and audio signals. To use the HDMI terminal,  
specify the types of video and audio signals being sent from the  
connected equipment. For signal types refer to the device’s  
operating manual.  
12  
To specify the digital video signal type:  
1
2
3
4
5
Press HOME MENU.  
Select “Option”. (  
Select “HDMI Input”. (  
Select “Video”. ( then ENTER)  
Select the type of digital video signals. (  
/
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
/
/
Before bringing up the menu, press INPUT 5 (or INPUT 6) on  
the remote control or press INPUT on the Plasma Display to  
select INPUT 5 (or INPUT 6).  
/
then ENTER)  
• If you select “Auto”, the panel automatically attempts to  
identify the type of digital video signal.  
Input signal correlation table  
1920[email protected]/60 Hz  
720[email protected]/60 Hz  
1280[email protected]/60 Hz  
720(1440)[email protected]/60 Hz  
19201080p@24 Hz  
Item  
Description  
Auto  
Automatically identifies input digital video signals  
(factory default)  
Color-1  
Digital Component Video signals (4:2:2) locked  
Digital Component Video signals (4:4:4) locked  
Digital RGB signals locked  
Color-2  
Color-3  
For audio, the panel supports the following:  
• Linear PCM (STEREO 2ch)  
6
Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu.  
• Sampling frequency: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz  
NOTE  
• If you select a parameter other than “Auto”, verify that the  
setting results in the appropriate colors.  
• If no image appears, specify another digital video signal type.  
NOTE  
• PC signals are not supported.  
• Images are sometimes slow to appear with some external  
devices.  
• Refer to the external device’s operating instructions for  
digital video signal types.  
To specify the type of audio signals:  
Connecting HDMI equipment  
Plasma Display (rear view)  
1
2
3
4
5
Press HOME MENU.  
Select “Option”. (  
Select “HDMI Input”. (  
Select “Audio”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
/
then ENTER)  
Viewed from the bottom  
of the Plasma Display  
/
then ENTER)  
Select the type of audio signals. (  
/
then ENTER)  
• If you select “Auto”, the panel automatically attempts to  
identify the type of audio signal.  
Item  
Auto  
Description  
HDMI cable with  
the HDMI mark  
(sold separately)  
Automatically identifies input audio signals  
(factory default)  
Digital  
Accepts digital audio signals  
Accepts analog audio signals  
Audio cable (sold  
separately)  
Analog  
Use when inputting  
analog audio signals.  
6
Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu.  
NOTE  
• If there is no sound, specify another audio signal type.  
• Refer to the external device’s operating instructions for  
audio signal types.  
HDMI equipment  
• Depending on the equipment to be connected, you may also  
need to connect analog audio cables.  
67  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using External Equipment  
12  
NOTE  
Using a game console or watching  
camcorder images  
• INPUT 4 checks for Component Video connections first then  
for Video.  
Use the desired connection for viewing.  
Connecting a game console or camcorder  
Use the INPUT 4 terminals to connect a game console,  
camcorder, or other audio/visual equipment.  
• Only connect external equipment to terminals that are to be  
actually used.  
Displaying an image of the game console or  
camcorder  
Plasma Display (left side view)  
To watch an image coming from the game console or  
camcorder, press INPUT 4 on the remote control or press  
INPUT on the Plasma Display to select INPUT4.  
Component Video cable  
(sold separately)  
AV cable  
(sold separately)  
Recording digital TV programs using a  
VCR  
To record, connect recording equipment such as a VCR to the  
panel’s MONITOR OUT terminals (rear of the Plasma Display).  
You can also record digital TV programs more easily by using  
the TV Guide On Screen™ system. Connect the supplied G-  
LINK cable to the G-LINK terminal on the rear of the Plasma  
Display. Position the G-LINK cable’s wand so that its light  
emitting section faces the remote control sensor on the  
recording equipment. For more information, see page 71.  
Avoiding unwanted feedback  
You can prevent unwanted feedback from affecting the image  
quality. To block the signal from the output terminal causing  
interference, follow the steps below.  
1
2
3
4
Press HOME MENU.  
Select “Option”. (  
Select “Monitor Out”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
Camcorder/Game Console  
/
Select “INPUT1 Prohibit”, “INPUT2 Prohibit”, “INPUT3  
Prohibit”, “INPUT4 Prohibit”, “INPUT 5 Prohibit” or  
“INPUT 6 Prohibit”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
5
Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu.  
68  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using External Equipment  
12  
Connecting a recorder  
Plasma Display (rear view)  
Connecting other audio equipment  
The panel’s digital audio output terminal (optical) can output  
Dolby Digital signals. Using an optical digital cable, connect  
an AV receiver to the optical terminal on the rear of the Plasma  
Display. This allows high-quality audio, such as during a digital  
TV broadcast, to play.  
If your AV receiver does not have a digital audio input terminal  
(optical), connect MONITOR OUT (AUDIO) on the rear of the  
Plasma Display to the audio input terminals on the AV receiver.  
This method may cause sound delays between the speakers and  
AUDIO. Try muting the speakers on the Plasma Display, however,  
you may still experience a delay between audio and video.  
Viewedfromthebottom  
of the Plasma Display  
Ferrite core  
NOTE  
• When using the digital audio output terminal (optical), set  
according to the AV receiver’s requirements. For more  
information, refer to the AV receiver’s operating instructions.  
G-LINK cable (supplied)  
AV cable  
(sold separately)  
Connecting an AV receiver  
Plasma Display (rear view)  
VCR  
Viewedfromthebottom  
of the Plasma Display  
NOTE  
• About the MONITOR OUT terminals  
The MONITOR OUT terminals cannot output the following  
signals:  
Optical digital cable  
(sold separately)  
•Video signals input from the COMPONENT VIDEO terminal  
•Video signals from a PC  
•Digital video and audio signals from the HDMI terminals  
• When watching images from a VCR connected to the panel’s  
MONITOR OUT, select an input source (e.g., TV channel  
reception) on the VCR other than an external input source.  
Selecting an external input source may cause distorted  
images or noise.  
AV cable  
(sold separately)  
This connection is  
notrequiredwhen  
connecting an AV  
amp equipped  
with surround  
sound to a  
• Place the VCR in Standby when selecting TV programs to  
record using the TV Guide On Screen™ system.  
subwoofer.  
• Using MONITOR OUT may cause delays between the  
speaker and AUDIO. If this delay occurs, try muting the  
speakers on the Plasma Display. However, you may still  
experience some delay between audio and video.  
Subwoofer  
AV receiver  
• The MONITOR OUT terminals cannot output any signals for  
networked audio or video.  
• If degraded picture quality is observed while viewing copy-  
protected VOD movies connect the Plasma Display directly  
to other TV sets. Do not connect through a VCR.  
NOTE  
• For details, refer to the audio device’s operating instructions.  
• The audio accompanying the images shown on the display is  
always output to the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT terminal.  
• When signals are input from the HDMI terminals, no digital  
or analog signals are output from the DIGITAL OUT terminal.  
• Input signals from the Home Media Gallery may cause audio  
delays between the speakers and OPTICAL. Try muting the  
speakers on the Plasma Display; however, you may still  
experience delays between audio and video.  
69  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using External Equipment  
12  
Switching the optical audio signal type  
Set up for the DIGITAL AUDIO output terminal (OPTICAL),  
according to your AV receiver’s operating instructions.  
Displaying an image from a PC  
When connected to a PC, the input signal type is automatically  
identified. If the image from the PC does not come in clearly,  
you may need to use Auto Setup. See page 62.  
To watch an image coming from the PC, press PC on the  
remote control or press INPUT on the Plasma Display to select  
“PC”.  
1
2
3
4
Press HOME MENU.  
Select “Option”. (  
Select “Digital Audio Out”. (  
Select “Dolby Digital” or “PCM”. (  
/
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
then ENTER)  
/
/
NOTE  
Item  
Description  
Dolby Digital: outputs in the Dolby Digital format  
• The PC terminals are for PC use only. Do not connect audio/  
visual equipment to PC terminals.  
Dolby Digital  
(factory default) PCM: outputs in the PCM format  
PCM Always outputs in the PCM format regardless of the  
Signal names for 15-pin mini D-sub connector  
types of signals  
5
4
3
2
1
5
Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu.  
10  
9
8
7
6
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
Watching an image from a computer  
(front view)  
Connecting a personal computer  
Use the PC terminals to connect a personal computer (PC).  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
1
R
2
G
NOTE  
3
B
• The PC input terminals are DDC2B-compatible.  
• Ability to use Plug & Play depends on the computer.  
4
Not connected  
Not connected  
GND (ground)  
GND (ground)  
GND (ground)  
+5V  
5
6
Plasma Display (rear view)  
7
Viewedfromthe bottom  
of the Plasma Display  
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
GND (ground)  
Not connected  
SDA  
HD  
VD  
RGB cable  
(sold  
SCL  
separately)  
NOTE  
AV cable with a mini plug  
(sold separately)  
(for PC audio connection)  
®
®
• An Apple Macintosh adaptor may be required for use with  
some Macintosh computers.  
Personal Computer  
70  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using External Equipment  
Computer compatibility chart  
12  
Attaching the ferrite core  
To help prevent noise, attach the supplied ferrite core to the  
connector end of the G-LINK cable as shown.  
Resolution  
Frequency  
720 × 400  
70 Hz  
60 Hz  
72 Hz  
75 Hz  
56 Hz  
60 Hz  
72 Hz  
75 Hz  
60 Hz  
70 Hz  
75 Hz  
60 Hz  
G-LINK cable  
Ferrite core  
640 × 480  
800 × 600  
1024 × 768  
1360 x 768  
Pull the cable slightly to  
take up any slack  
A.  
G-LINK™ connection  
A
To record with a VCR through the TV Guide On Screen™  
system, connect the VCR to the panel using the G-LINK cable.  
NOTE  
As close as possible  
• In order to use a VCR with the TV Guide On Screen™ system,  
confirm the factors listed below. See “TV Guide On Screen™  
System Setup” on page 30.  
CAUTION  
• The G-LINK cable’s wand must be positioned so that its light  
emitting section faces the VCR’s remote control sensor.  
• The VCR is in Standby when selecting TV programs to record  
using the TV Guide On Screen™ system.  
• Regarding the G-LINK cable, attach the supplied ferrite core.  
If you do not do this, this Plasma Display will not conform to  
mandatory FCC standards.  
• Avoid the cable loops when making the connection.  
When connecting the VCR  
Plasma Display (rear view)  
Viewed from the bottom  
of the Plasma Display  
Ferrite core  
G-LINK cable (supplied)  
AV cable (sold  
separately)  
G-LINK cable’s wand  
Point to the remote  
control sensor  
VCR  
71  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using External Equipment  
12  
Plasma Display (rear view)  
Connecting control cables  
Connect control cables between the Plasma Display and other  
PIONEER equipment having the  
logo. These control cables  
carry commands from a Pioneer device through its remote  
control to the remote control sensor on the Plasma Display.  
After the CONTROL IN terminals have been connected, the  
remote control sensors on the device does not accept  
commands from the remote control. Point the remote control  
at the remote control sensor on the Plasma Display to operate  
the device.  
NOTE  
• Make sure that the power is turned Off when connecting  
cables.  
CONTROL  
IN  
• Connect all components before plugging cables into the  
panel.  
OUT  
About SR+  
The CONTROL OUT terminal on the rear of the Plasma Display  
supports SR+. This terminal supports linked operations with a  
PIONEER AV receiver. SR+ includes functions such as input  
switch linkage operation and DSP surround display. For more  
information, see the Pioneer AV receiver’s operating  
instructions regarding SR+ support.  
CONTROL  
IN  
OUT  
NOTE  
• When connecting control cables, use the SR+ cable.  
• When connecting one or more Pioneer devices, directly  
connect the Plasma Display and an SR+ supported Pioneer  
amplifier. Do not daisychain other equipment between the  
Pioneer units.  
• When operating devices using SR+, volume on the Plasma  
Display is lowered temporarily.  
CONTROL  
IN  
OUT  
When SR+ is not used:  
Use mono sound control cables with  
mini plugs, no resistance (sold  
separately)  
When SR+ is used:  
Use the SR+ cable (sold as an option).  
72  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using External Equipment  
12  
NOTE  
Enjoying the Home Media Gallery  
• Content may not play or display properly depending on the  
conditions of use.  
• Sources for this panel include media servers that support  
DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance) and Windows Media  
Connect (WMC) running on the LAN network, or SD Card,  
MS, MMC, xD Picture and CF that comply with the Mass  
Storage File System through a USB interface.  
• Supported formats and contents are subject to change. Visit  
the Pioneer website for updated information:  
http://www.pioneerelectronics.com  
• The Home Media Gallery functions as a WMDRM10-ND  
(Microsoft Windows Media DRM for networked devices).  
Content can only be navigated from the media servers that  
support WMDRM10-ND.  
With Home Media Gallery, you can enjoy digital content such  
as movies, music and photo files. These files can be saved on  
one or more media servers connected by a home network  
(LAN) or from content stored on USB devices. After connecting  
via an Ethernet hub to a media server with network software*,  
you can navigate through the server’s digital content using the  
Plasma Display. For USB interface, the Plasma Display  
supports Mass Storage Class devices.  
* Referred to as a “media server” that contains digital content  
such as movies, music and photo files. PCs that have pre-  
installed media server software and recorders with a media  
server function are considered the media server. Use PCs that  
have a Windows Media Connect (WMC) server or DLNA  
compliant server for the Home Media Gallery function.  
Take a Windows Media Connect (WMC) server for example:  
Microsoft Media Server is freeware and works with any music  
jukebox-type software, although is optimized for Windows  
Media Player.  
• The system may not be able to display content from  
incompatible memory cards.  
• You cannot use the Home Media Gallery until dimmed  
elements on the menu screen turn white.  
Installing Windows Media Connect  
Digital Audio Output terminal (Optical)  
Before installing Windows Media Connect, make sure that  
Windows XP SP2 and other required software are installed.  
See Microsoft Website for details regarding minimum system  
requirements and installation procedures.  
NOTE  
• When using the optical output terminal for networked audio or  
video:  
If the Plasma Display and audio system are in the same room,  
you may experience an audio delay between the plasma  
speakers and the audio system. Try muting the speakers on  
the Plasma Display to correct this delay. However, this action  
may cause delays between audio and video.  
1
Download the most recent version of Windows Media  
Player  
This can be downloaded either directly from the Microsoft  
Website, or using the Windows Update Installer.  
2
Download the most recent Windows Media Connect  
software  
This can be downloaded either directly from the Microsoft  
Website, or using the Windows Update Installer.  
Supported file formats  
The table below shows supported file formats that can be  
played back or displayed on the Plasma Display. These formats  
are applicable to both network and USB sources. However,  
media server content protected by digital rights management,  
such as WMDRM10 (Digital Rights Management for Windows  
Media 10), may not play on the Plasma Display.  
Type of files  
Format  
Movie  
MPEG PS (mpg, mpeg, mpe, m2p), MPEG-2 TS/TTS,  
WMV (asf, wmv), MPEG4 (mp4)  
Music  
Photo  
MP3 (mp3), LPCM, WAV (wav), WMA (asf, wma)  
JPEG (jpg, jpeg), BMP (bmp), PNG (png), TIFF (tif, tiff),  
GIF (gif)  
• Some formats may not be supported depending on the  
server type or version used.  
73  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using External Equipment  
12  
Confirming the IP Address  
Making network connections  
To connect to a network, set up the Home Media Gallery  
through the panel’s menu. Connect to a home network (LAN)  
via an Ethernet hub or cable directly to a media server.  
After making the network connection, follow the instructions  
below to confirm the panel’s IP Address before accessing the  
network. (The setup is effective for “Auto” only. To perform the  
procedure, DHCP on your server or router must be valid.)  
1
2
3
4
5
Press HOME MENU.  
NOTE  
Select “Home Media Gallery” (  
/
then ENTER).  
• Although the Home Media Gallery supports 10BASE-T, it is  
better to use 100BASE-TX for improved display quality and  
speed.  
Select “Setup” (  
/
then ENTER).  
then ENTER).  
Select “Network Setup” (  
/
Connecting via an Ethernet hub  
Select “Automatically acquire IP” (  
ENTER).  
• The screen turns from “Select” mode to “Input” mode.  
/
/
/
then  
If you already operate one or more media servers on a local  
area network (LAN), connect the Plasma Display to the  
Ethernet (LAN) hub using a standard (“straight-through”)  
Ethernet (LAN) cable. See the diagram below.  
6
Select “Yes” ( then ENTER).  
/
• The IP Address is automatically assigned.  
Media Server 2  
Plasma Display  
(rear view)  
• The Home Media Gallery supports Auto IP and DHCP  
(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol). If the system  
failed to acquire the IP Address or if you want to obtain  
different addresses, select “No” then enter “IP Address”  
and “Subnet mask”. Use the 0 to 9 and  
/
/
/
Ethernet Hub  
(Router with hub function)  
buttons to enter an address, then press ENTER. You do  
not need to enter “Default Gateway” and “DNS Server”.  
Viewed from the  
bottom of the  
Plasma Display  
7
8
Select “OK” (  
/
then ENTER).  
• The “Reset” dialog appears on screen.  
Select “OK” and press ENTER.  
Straight-through  
Cable  
• The home network module restarts.  
• A message “Setting up Home Media Gallery. Please wait  
until initialized.” appears on screen.  
• When the initialization is finished, setting values  
become effective and the top menu of the Home Media  
Gallery returns.  
Media Server 1  
NOTE  
Connecting directly to a Media Server  
To run a PC as a media server, connect the Plasma Display  
directly to the PC using a twisted (“cross-over”) Ethernet (LAN)  
cable. See the diagram below.  
• For information on DHCP, refer to network device’s  
operating instructions.  
• You may need to contact your service provider or network  
administrator when manually entering an IP Address.  
• Some media servers block or are programmed to block  
access to client servers. When connecting the Plasma  
Display, check the media server for client server access  
rights.  
Plasma Display  
(rear view)  
Connecting a USB device  
Viewed from the  
bottom of the  
Plasma Display  
You can also enjoy content stored on memory cards by  
connecting a USB device to the Plasma Display. When you  
insert a USB memory or multi-card reader into the USB port,  
the root directory or the Device List screen appears. In addition,  
you can connect your digital camera directly to the Plasma  
Display using a USB connector cable.  
Cross-over Cable  
1
2
3
Press HOME MENU.  
Select “Home Media Gallery” (  
/
then ENTER).  
Select “USB” (  
/
then ENTER).  
• The Device List is displayed on screen with the selected  
device highlighted if you have not checked in the “Single  
Server/USB” box after selecting “Setup” and then “Auto  
Connection Setup”. If you have checked in the box, the  
list is skipped.  
Media Server 1  
74  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using External Equipment  
12  
Removing a USB device  
To remove a USB device, exit the Home Media Gallery first and  
then disconnect the device.  
4
Select the desired device (  
/
then ENTER).  
• You can select a device only when the Device List is  
displayed.  
5
6
Press ENTER to navigate to a folder or play a file/content.  
NOTE  
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.  
• Be sure to exit the Home Media Gallery screen before  
removing the USB device. If you remove the USB device  
while the Home Media Gallery screen is displayed, data  
inside the memory may be damaged.  
• Do not insert or remove the USB device immediately after the  
system is switched On or Off. This action may cause data  
inside the memory to be damaged.  
Press HOME MENU again to exit the Home Media Gallery.  
NOTE  
• If the Home Media Gallery is launched and the “Single  
Server/USB” box is checked after selecting “Setup” and then  
“Auto Connection Setup”, the system displays the root  
directory immediately after inserting a USB device. In this  
case, you can start from step 5. When a multi-card reader is  
inserted, the Device List appears with the selected device  
highlighted. In this case, you can start from step 4.  
• PIONEER is not liable for any loss or damage to the data  
inside the USB memory.  
Starting the Home Media Gallery function  
Plasma Display  
1
2
3
Press HOME MENU.  
Select “Home Media Gallery” (  
/
then ENTER).  
USB flash memory  
Select “Media Navigator”, “USB”, “My Playlist” or “Setup”  
then ENTER).  
(
/
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.  
4
Press HOME MENU again to exit the Home Media Gallery.  
Home Media Gallery  
Digital Camera with USB  
Mass Storage Class  
Media Navigator  
Server  
XXXXXX  
USB  
My Playlist  
Setup  
1
Flash media via USB adapter (Multi-card Reader )  
Navigating the files and folders  
By selecting Media Navigator, the previously selected server  
menu is automatically displayed on the screen by default (page  
88). When only one server is found, the system automatically  
connects the server. You can also use the Tool Menu to switch  
to another server or manually select a server from the Server  
List. The display is automatically changed to a server list if  
there are no previously navigated servers.  
Readable memory cards  
This system reads FAT12, FAT16, FAT32, or VFAT Memory  
Cards.  
Readable data files  
Movie, music and photo files can also be played with the  
exception of Digital Rights Management for Windows Media  
10 (DRM) protected files.  
1
2
3
Press HOME MENU.  
Select “Home Media Gallery” (  
/
then ENTER).  
Select “Media Navigator” (  
/
then ENTER).  
NOTE  
• A server menu appears. The file/folder configuration  
may vary depending on the server selected.  
• After selecting a category, folder or container and  
navigating on subsequent screens, you can find a file  
and start the appropriate Player depending on the  
selected file.  
• A single USB device can be connected at a time and no USB  
hub connected.  
• This system may not be able to display modified or edited  
content from a PC or other equipment.  
• This system supports the USB Mass Storage Class.  
4
5
Select the desired folder to navigate or file/content to play  
(
/
or  
/
then ENTER).  
Press ENTER to display a subsequent screen.  
• Subsequent screen(s) appears.  
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.  
6
Press HOME MENU again to exit the Home Media Gallery.  
75  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using External Equipment  
12  
Selectable screen display  
Screen on which Tool  
Menu is available  
Menu items  
Function  
Menu display options are: “List”, “Thumbnail” or “Thumbnail  
List”. Press D then select “Change view” from the Tool Menu to  
choose from the screen display options.  
List screen  
Slide Show Setup Used to set up a slide-  
Server List/Media  
Navigator/USB/My  
Playlist/Playlist List  
(Movie/Music/Photo)/  
Folder Contents List/  
Contents List/Photo  
Player  
show on the Photo  
Player  
All Photos  
XXXX  
Title  
XXXX  
XXXX  
XXXX  
Album  
XXXX  
XXXX  
XXXX  
Date  
XXXX  
XXXX  
XXXX  
2006/11/19  
Server  
XXXXXX  
1/27  
Add to My  
Playlist  
Adds the selected files  
to My Playlist  
Media Navigator/Folder  
Contents List/Contents  
List/Movie Player/Music  
Player/Photo Player  
1
Tool  
D
*1  
Thumbnail screen  
Select Server  
Stop Music*2  
Moves to the Server List Media Navigator/Folder  
All Photos  
XXXX  
screen  
Contents List/Contents  
List  
All Photos  
Add to My Playlist  
Change view  
Sort  
Til  
X
List  
Title  
XXXX  
Thumbnail  
Thunbnail List  
XXXX  
All  
X
Album  
XXXX  
Search  
Stops playback of a  
music file  
Media Navigator/Playlist  
List (Movie/ Music/  
Slide Show Settings  
Detailed Display  
Select Searver  
Stop Music  
Da  
2
Se  
X
Date  
XXXX  
2006/11/19  
Server  
XXXXXX  
XXXX  
XXXX  
Photo)/Folder Contents  
List/Contents List/Music  
Player/Photo Player  
1/27  
1/27  
1
Tool  
D
1
Tool  
D
Change Name  
Change view  
Used to change content Playlist List (Movie/  
Thumbnail List screen  
names in My Playlist  
Music/Photo)  
All Photos  
XXXX  
Switches the screen  
display to List,  
Folder Contents List/  
Contents List  
Title  
XXXX  
XXXX  
XXXX  
Album  
XXXX  
Date  
Thumbnail, or  
Thumbnail List  
2006/11/19  
Server  
XXXXXX  
XXXX  
1/27  
1
Tool  
D
Time Search  
Slow Playback  
BGM Setup  
Move  
Starts playback at the  
preset time on the Movie Player  
or Music Player screen  
Movie Player/Music  
Plays back in the slow  
mode on the Movie or  
Music screen  
Movie Player/Music  
Player  
Using the Tool Menu  
Press D on the remote control to access the pop-up Tool Menu.  
Various play and display modes can be selected from the Tool  
Menu. The selectable menu items differ depending on the  
submenu (see the table below).  
Used to set up the slide- Photo Player  
show BGM on the Photo  
Player  
Moves the order of  
content in My Playlist  
Contents List (Playlist)  
Screen on which Tool  
Menu is available  
Menu items  
Function  
Delete from My  
Playlist*1  
Deletes the selected  
content from My Playlist  
Contents List (Playlist)  
Update to Latest  
Information  
Updates the server  
connection status  
Server List (connected/  
not connected)  
Delete Server  
Deletes the server(s)  
that are dimmed on the connected)  
list  
Server List (server not  
1
*
*
When a file is selected  
While music is played  
2
USB Devices List  
Moves to the USB  
Devices List screen  
Folder Contents List  
(USB)/Contents List  
(USB)  
Consecutive  
Playback  
Continuously plays video Media Navigator/Folder  
content starting from the Contents List/Contents  
selected item  
List  
Detailed Display  
Sort  
Displays the detailed  
information on the  
selected content  
Media Navigator/Folder  
Contents List/Contents  
List  
Sorts items in Folder or Media Navigator/Folder  
Contents List  
Contents List/Contents  
List  
Search  
Searches the desired  
items in Folder or  
Folder Contents List/  
Contents List  
Contents List by word  
76  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using External Equipment  
12  
4
5
Select a Playlist list from “Movie Playlist”, “Music Playlist”  
or “Photo Playlist” ( then ENTER).  
Select the desired content ( or  
Media Navigator  
/
While navigating through the folders a media server provides,  
you can select the desired file to start the corresponding player  
by pressing ENTER.  
/
/
then ENTER).  
• The menu can be displayed as a “List”, “Thumbnail” or  
“Thumbnail List” screen. Press D then select “Change  
Screen Components  
view” from the Tool Menu (  
/
then ENTER).  
6
7
Press ENTER to play or display.  
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.  
1
3
Press HOME MENU again to exit the Home Media Gallery.  
Media Navigator  
Movie  
4
Title  
Movie  
Music  
Photos  
User Files  
Server  
XXXXXX  
Enjoying movie files  
You can display the menu as a “List”, “Thumbnail” or  
“Thumbnail List” screen. Press D then select an option under  
“Change view” on the Tool Menu. You can also navigate  
through the subsequent or preceding menu levels in the server  
5
6
1/4  
1
Tool  
D
2
7
or USB device by pressing  
/
/
/
/ENTER. When you  
select movie content from the server menu on the Media  
Navigator screen, the Movie Player automatically launches.  
Select a category, folder, or device to access the submenu  
containing the required file or content.  
The Movie Player screen appears when you select a movie file  
from My Playlist, just like selecting a file in the server.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Thumbnail of the file selected (if obtained)  
Name of the server currently selected  
Current menu level  
Item being selected (highlighted in yellow)  
File number/total number of files  
Number of servers connected  
Key guide  
Screen Components  
1 2  
3
4
XXXX  
2006/11/30 00:00:59  
XXXX  
5
NOTE  
• The Media Navigator is not launched depending on the  
option selected in “Auto Connection Setup” (page 88). The  
screen displays after selecting a server in the server list.  
10  
12  
USB  
Playback  
A-B  
LR A-B  
RDM  
00 : 00 : 45  
Like navigating through the media servers, you can select the  
desired file contained in the device selected on the USB  
Devices List screen to start the corresponding player by  
pressing ENTER. You can also select the menu displayed on  
either “List”, “Thumbnail” or “Thumbnail List” screen. Press D  
and select “Change view” from the Tool Menu.  
A
Repeat  
Random  
Tool  
B
C
D
7
6
8
9
11  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Movie icon  
Title (Category or Folder name)  
Date  
Album name  
Play time  
Play status  
Key guide  
Progress bar  
Audio mode icon  
NOTE  
• The USB Devices List screen may not be displayed  
depending on the option selected in “Auto Connection  
Setup”. “Single Server/USB” is selected for “Auto  
Connection Setup” by default. You don't need to select a  
device in the USB Devices List when you use a single  
directory device (USB memory).  
10 A-B repeat mode icon  
11 Repeat mode icon  
12 Random mode icon (appears when the mode is valid)  
My Playlist  
Each category (Movie, Music and Photo) has five different  
Playlists in which you can register up to 100 files each. The My  
Playlist option can contain sound and image files selected in  
the “Media Navigator”. To edit a Playlist, use the Tool Menu  
(page 76).  
1
2
3
Press HOME MENU.  
Select “Home Media Gallery” (  
/
then ENTER).  
Select “My Playlist” (  
/
then ENTER).  
77  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using External Equipment  
12  
Movie Player key guide  
Play modes  
ENTER:  
Pauses while playback or plays back while in PAUSE  
Time Search  
(Tool Menu)  
(Tool Menu)  
(Tool Menu)  
Plays back the selected content  
from the time preset on the Movie  
Player  
Fast reverse during playback or when in PAUSE. Each  
press toggles the reverse speed between x 2, x 4, x 8,  
x 20, x 50, and x 100 or the slow mode speed between  
x 1/2, x 1/4, x 1/8, and x 1/16. When the beginning of the  
content is reached, it pauses.  
:
Slow  
Playback  
Plays back the content in slow  
mode on the Movie or Music  
Player  
Fast forward while playback or PAUSE. Each press  
toggles the forward speed between x 2, x 4, x 8, x 20,  
x 50, and x 100 or the slow mode speed between x 1/16,  
x 1/8, x 1/4, and x 1/2. When the end of the content is  
reached, it pauses.  
:
Add to My  
Playlist  
Adds the selected content to My  
Playlist List (Not available while  
movie content in the Playlist is  
played back.)  
Stop Movie  
Player  
(STOP),  
RETURN  
Stops the Movie Player  
Skips 15 seconds backward and plays back or pauses  
while in PAUSE  
:
:
Fast Forward/  
Fast Reverse  
See the key guide table  
/
,
Skips 15 seconds forward and plays back or pauses  
while in PAUSE  
/
Forward/  
Reverse  
(15 sec.)  
See the key guide table  
(PLAY):  
(PAUSE):  
(STOP):  
Plays back the content  
Pauses the playback  
/
Stops the Player and returns to the previous screen  
(List/Thumbnail/Thumbnail List)  
Play  
ENTER,  
(PLAY)  
See the key guide table  
See the key guide table  
(FF):  
Same as  
mode)  
(only fast forward function while in the slow  
A-B Repeat  
Mode  
A (BLUE)  
(RWD):  
A (BLUE):  
Same as  
mode)  
(only fast reverse function while in the slow  
Repeat Mode  
B (RED)  
See the key guide table  
See the key guide table  
Random  
Mode  
C (GREEN)  
Sets A-B repeat mode. Sets the desired point A to start  
and B to end during playback. To cancel the mode,  
press A (BLUE) on the remote control.  
(Tool Menu)  
D (YELLOW) See the key guide table  
B (RED):  
Every press toggles the repeat mode between “No  
Repeat” and “Repeat Once” or between “No Repeat”,  
“Repeat Once” and “Repeat All” while in Playlist  
NOTE  
• Some functions may not be supported depending on the  
server type or version used.  
C (GREEN):  
D (YELLOW):  
Available only in Playlist or “Consecutive Playback”  
mode. Every press toggles the random mode between  
“Random Off” and “Random On”.  
Time Search  
Switches the Tool Menu display on and off. Even if the  
Tool Menu is displayed while content is played back, a  
movie is kept playing but the time counter and progress  
bar do not function.  
1
In playback mode or PAUSE, press D then select “Time  
Search” from the Tool Menu ( then ENTER).  
• A “Time Search” dialog screen appears.  
/
INFO:  
MTS:  
Displays the Player status at the bottom of the screen  
while a movie is played back. Another press of the key  
displays a key guide, as well. Pressing the key once  
more cancels all the information display.  
2
Select “Hour” and/or “Minute” for “Input Time” (  
ENTER).  
• Enter the desired time using buttons 0 to 9.  
/
then  
Time Search  
Every press of the key toggles the audio mode between  
“L + R”, “L” and “R”  
Input Time  
RETURN:  
Same function as STOP  
Adjusts the sound volume  
Mutes the sound  
H
Min  
1
VOL+, VOL-:  
MUTING:  
OK  
Cancel  
HOME MENU: Quit the Home Media Gallery and returns to the last  
entry screen. Resumes the content selected again on  
the Home Media Gallery.  
3
4
Press ENTER after the entry is complete.  
Select “OK” ( then ENTER).  
• The movie begins playing from the time you set.  
/
• To cancel the Time Search, select “Cancel” and press  
ENTER.  
5
Press HOME MENU to exit the Home Media Gallery.  
78  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using External Equipment  
12  
Slow Playback  
A-B Repeat Mode  
1
In playback mode or PAUSE, press D then select “Slow  
Playback” from the Tool Menu.  
1
While playing content, press A where you want repeat to  
start.  
2
Press ENTER.  
2
Press A again where you want repeat to end.  
• Slow playback begins.  
• The Player status appears on the screen and the A-B  
mode icon changes.  
• The selected movie scenes are repeatedly played back.  
• You can change the playback speed by pressing  
while in the slow mode.  
/
• To return to normal mode, press A again while in the  
A-B repeat mode.  
• To discontinue slow playback, press ENTER or PLAY.  
The system returns to the normal playback mode.  
3
Press HOME MENU to exit the Home Media Gallery.  
3
Press HOME MENU to exit the Home Media Gallery.  
NOTE  
Add to My Playlist  
• The A-B repeat function is only available during playback in  
normal mode.  
1
While navigating or playing, select the file to be added to  
My Playlist ( then ENTER).  
Press D then select “Add to My Playlist” from the Tool  
Menu ( then ENTER).  
• A “Playlist Selection” dialog screen appears.  
Select a Playlist ( then ENTER).  
/
/
/
2
Repeat Mode  
/
1
While playing content in the Media Navigator or USB  
device, press B to select “Repeat Once”.  
3
/
• The title being played is repeated.  
• A check mark is provided beside the selected Playlist.  
2
Press B again to cancel the repeat mode (“Repeat Off” is  
selected).  
• After playing the currently selected title, the Player  
stops.  
• When you select a different Playlist and press ENTER,  
the mark jumps to the new Playlist from the previously  
selected one.  
3
Press HOME MENU to exit the Home Media Gallery.  
Playlist Selection  
Select a Playlist to register  
NOTE  
Playlist1  
Playlist2  
Playlist3  
Playlist4  
Playlist5  
20  
0
0
0
0
• When playing content in the Playlist, you can select from  
“Repeat Off”, “Repeat All” (plays all items in the Playlist  
repeatedly) or “Repeat Once” (plays the content being  
watched repeatedly).  
OK  
Cancel  
Random Mode  
4
5
Select “OK” (  
/
then ENTER).  
1
While playing content in the Playlist, press C to select  
“Random On”.  
• Random Repeat playback starts.  
• The file is added to the selected Playlist.  
• To cancel the operation, select “Cancel” then press  
ENTER.  
2
3
Press C again to cancel the random mode (“Random Off”  
is selected).  
Press HOME MENU to exit the Home Media Gallery.  
Press HOME MENU to exit the Home Media Gallery.  
Fast Forward/Fast Reverse  
NOTE  
1
While playing content, press and hold for Fast Reverse  
or press and hold for Fast Forward.  
• The Random Repeat mode is only available for content in the  
Playlist, or in “Consecutive Playback” mode.  
Forward/Reverse (15 sec.)  
While playing content, press and hold  
1
or  
backward or forward in 15-second increments.  
to jump  
79  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using External Equipment  
12  
Music Player key guide  
Enjoying music files  
Moves up a cursor to a title above  
You can display the menu as a “List”, “Thumbnail” or  
“Thumbnail List” screen. Press D then select an option under  
“Change view” on the Tool Menu. You can also navigate  
through the subsequent or preceding menu levels in the server  
:
Moves down a cursor to a title below  
:
ENTER:  
Plays back the selected music content. Pauses the  
music content being played if it is highlighted in the  
Playlist screen or plays the selected music content if  
or USB device by pressing  
/
/
/
/ENTER.  
When you select music content from the server menu on the  
Media Navigator screen, the Music Player automatically  
launches. Select a category, folder, or device to access the  
submenu containing the required file or content. The Music  
Player screen appears when you select a music file from My  
Playlist, just like selecting a file in the server.  
different content is highlighted by pressing  
/
.
Fast reverse during playback or when in PAUSE. Each  
press toggles the reverse speed between x 2, x 4, x 8,  
x 20, x 50, and x 100. When the beginning of the content  
is reached, it pauses.  
:
:
Fast forward during playback or when in PAUSE. Each  
press toggles the forward speed between x 2, x 4, x 8,  
x 20, x 50, and x 100. When the end of the content is  
reached, it pauses.  
NOTE  
• The Music Player only displays a “List” screen.  
Screen Components  
RETURN:  
Returns to the previous screen (List/Thumbnail/  
Thumbnail List). Content being played does not stop.  
1
3
4
(PLAY):  
Plays back the selected content. Pauses while in  
playback and plays while in PAUSE.  
All Music  
XXXX  
XXXX  
XXXX  
XXXX  
XXXX  
XXXX  
XXXX  
XXXX  
(PAUSE):  
Pauses the playback  
XXXX  
XXXX  
(STOP):  
Stops the Player and does not return to the previous  
screen (Selecting the “Stop Music” from the Tool Menu  
also stops the Player.)  
2
6
XXXX  
5
00:01:00  
Other  
2/20  
A-B  
(FF):  
Same as  
Same as  
Playback  
A-B  
RDM  
00 : 00 : 14  
13  
A
B
Repeat  
Random  
Tool  
C
D
(RWD):  
A (BLUE):  
Sets A-B repeat mode. Sets the desired point A to start  
and B to end during playback. To cancel the mode,  
press A (BLUE) on the remote control.  
9
7
8
10  
11 12  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Title (Category or Folder name)  
Jacket image (Music icon)  
Music status icon  
Contents list  
B (RED):  
Every press toggles the repeat mode between “No  
Repeat”, “Repeat Once” and “Repeat All”  
C (GREEN):  
D (YELLOW):  
Every press toggles the random mode between  
“Random Off” and “Random On”  
Number of items  
Detailed display  
Play status  
Time counter  
Key guide  
Displays the Tool Menu. Even if the Tool Menu is  
displayed while content is played back, music is kept  
playing but the time counter and progress bar do not  
function.  
10 Progress bar  
PAGE+, PAGE-: Available only when there are one or more pages in the  
content. Change the pages back and forth.  
11 A-B repeat mode icon  
12 Repeat mode icon  
13 Random mode icon  
VOL+, VOL-:  
MUTING:  
Adjusts the sound volume  
Mutes the sound  
HOME MENU: Quit the Home Media Gallery and returns to the last  
entry screen  
80  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using External Equipment  
12  
4
Press HOME MENU to exit the Home Media Gallery.  
Play modes  
Add to My Playlist  
(Tool Menu)  
(Tool Menu)  
Adds the selected content to My  
Playlist List (Not available while  
music content is played back.)  
Random Mode  
1
While playing content in the Playlist, press C to select  
“Random On”.  
Time Search  
Plays back the selected content  
from the time preset on the Music  
Player  
• Random Repeat playback starts.  
2
3
Press C again to cancel the random mode (“Random Off”  
is selected).  
Stop Music  
(Tool Menu), Stops the Music Player  
(STOP)  
Fast Forward/  
Fast Reverse  
See the key guide table  
Press HOME MENU to exit the Home Media Gallery.  
/
,
/
Moves Up/Down  
a cursor  
See the key guide table  
See the key guide table  
See the key guide table  
Enjoying photo files  
/
You can display the menu as a “List”, “Thumbnail” or  
“Thumbnail List” screen. Press D then select an option under  
“Change view” on the Tool Menu. You can also navigate  
through the subsequent or preceding menu levels in the server  
Play  
ENTER,  
(PLAY)  
A-B Repeat  
Mode  
A (BLUE)  
or USB device by pressing  
/
/
/
/ENTER.  
When you select photo content from the server menu on the  
Media Navigator screen, the Photo Player automatically  
launches. The selected content is displayed in full screen by  
pressing ENTER. Select a category, folder or device to access  
the submenu containing the required file or content.  
Repeat Mode  
B (RED)  
See the key guide table  
See the key guide table  
Random  
Mode  
C (GREEN)  
(Tool Menu)  
D (YELLOW) See the key guide table  
Pressing ENTER again allows a slideshow to begin. After a  
slideshow launches, pressing ENTER toggles between “PLAY”  
and “PAUSE”. Instead of pressing ENTER twice, you can press  
PLAY to start the slideshow immediately.  
• Setup procedures for the above play modes are the same as  
for the Movie Player.  
• Refer to page 76 for the color button D (Tool Menu).  
The Photo Player screen appears when you select a photo file  
from My Playlist, just like selecting a file in the server.  
NOTE  
• Some functions may not be supported depending on the  
server type or version used.  
Screen Components  
1 2  
3
A-B Repeat Mode  
XXXX  
2006/11/30  
XXXX  
1
While playing content, press A where you want repeat to  
start.  
4
2
Press A again where you want repeat to end.  
• The Player status appears on the screen and the A-B  
repeat mode icon changes.  
• The selected part of the title is repeatedly played back.  
• To return to normal mode, press A again while in the A-B  
repeat mode.  
9
10  
Playback  
RDM  
6
/
27  
B
Repeat  
C
Random  
D
Tool  
6
7
5
8
3
Press HOME MENU to exit the Home Media Gallery.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Photo icon  
Title (Category or Folder name)  
Album name  
Date  
Number of items  
Play status  
Key guide  
Progress bar  
Repeat mode icon  
NOTE  
• The A-B repeat function is only available during playback in  
normal mode.  
Repeat Mode  
1
2
3
While playing content in the Media Navigator, USB device  
or Playlist, press B to select “Repeat All”.  
• All titles in the folder or Playlist are played repeatedly.  
Press B again to cancel the repeat mode (“Repeat Once”  
is selected).  
• The title being played is repeated.  
10 Random mode icon  
Press B once more to cancel the repeat mode (“Repeat  
Off” is selected).  
• After playing the currently selected title, the Player  
stops.  
81  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using External Equipment  
12  
Photo Player key guide  
Play modes  
ENTER:  
Starts displaying a photo or playing a slideshow. Pauses  
while playback or plays back while in PAUSE.  
BGM Setup  
(Tool Menu) Sets up BGM  
Slide Show  
Setup  
(Tool Menu) Allows various slideshow setups  
on the Photo player  
RETURN:  
Stops the Player and returns to the previous screen  
(List/Thumbnail/Thumbnail List)  
Add to My  
Playlist  
(Tool Menu) Adds the selected content to My  
Playlist List (Not available while  
Displays the previous image content  
Display the next image content  
,
,
:
:
photo content is displayed.)  
Stop Photo  
Player  
(STOP),  
RETURN  
Stops the Photo Player  
See the key guide table  
See the key guide table  
See the key guide table  
(PLAY):  
(PAUSE):  
(STOP):  
Plays a slideshow  
Pauses the slideshow  
Move File Forward/  
Backward  
(
/
/
/
)
Stops the Player and returns to the previous screen  
(List/Thumbnail/Thumbnail List)  
Slideshow  
ENTER,  
(PLAY)  
(FF):  
Rotates the image 90º clockwise. Each press toggles  
the rotation angle by 90º between 90º, 180º, 270º and 0º.  
Rotate  
A (BLUE),  
/  
(RWD):  
Rotates the image 90º counter-clockwise. Each press  
toggles the rotation angle by 90º between 270º, 180º,  
90º, and 0º.  
Repeat Mode  
B (RED)  
See the key guide table  
See the key guide table  
Random  
Mode  
C (GREEN)  
A (BLUE):  
B (RED):  
Rotates the image 90º clockwise. Each press toggles  
the rotation angle by 90º between 90º, 180º, 270º and 0º.  
(Tool Menu)  
D (YELLOW) See the key guide table  
Every press toggles the repeat mode between “No  
Repeat” and “Repeat All”  
• Setup procedures for the above play modes are the same as  
for the Movie Player.  
• Refer to page 76 for the color button D (Tool Menu).  
C (GREEN):  
D (YELLOW):  
Every press toggles the random mode between  
“Random Off” and “Random On”  
Displays the Tool Menu. If the Tool Menu is displayed  
while a slideshow is played, the slideshow and BGM are  
paused.  
NOTE  
• Some functions may not be supported depending on the  
server type or version used.  
INFO:  
Displays the Player status at the bottom of the screen  
while image content is played. Another press of the key  
displays a key guide, as well. No Player information is  
displayed when an image is shown in full screen (no  
slideshow has been started). Other information may  
display. Pressing the key once more cancels all the  
information display.  
Setting up the slideshow  
You can enjoy a slideshow with music in the background. To  
activate this feature, you must register music content in My  
Playlist List beforehand (see “My Playlist” on page 77 and  
“Setting up BGM” on page 83).  
VOL+, VOL-:  
MUTING:  
HOME:  
Adjusts the sound volume  
Mutes the sound  
1
2
3
4
Press HOME MENU.  
Replaced by the Home Menu key. Quit the Home Media  
Gallery and returns to the last entry screen.  
Select “Home Media Gallery” (  
/
then ENTER).  
Select “Media Navigator” (  
/
then ENTER).  
Press D.  
• A pop-up screen of the Tool Menu appears.  
Select “Slide Show Setup” ( then ENTER).  
Select the desired setup item ( then ENTER).  
5
6
7
/
/
Enter the setting in the “Effect” or “Interval” box (  
then ENTER).  
/
• Repeat steps 6 and 7 to enter another setup.  
Slide Show Setup  
Effect  
Auto  
Interval  
3 seconds  
OK  
Cancel  
8
Select “OK” (  
/
then ENTER).  
• The slideshow setup finishes.  
82  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using External Equipment  
12  
6
7
Select “BGM ON”, “BGM ON (Random)” or “BGM OFF”  
from the BGM status box ( then ENTER).  
Select “OK” ( then ENTER).  
NOTE  
/
• After setting the “Interval” time, it may take longer than the  
preset time until the next image is obtained.  
/
Starting the slideshow  
Rotating the image  
1
2
3
Press HOME MENU.  
1
2
3
Press HOME MENU.  
Select “Home Media Gallery” (  
Select photo content in the Media Navigator, USB device  
or My Playlist ( then ENTER).  
Select “Home Media Gallery” (  
/
then ENTER).  
/
then ENTER).  
Select photo content in the Media Navigator, USB device  
or My Playlist ( then ENTER).  
/
/
/
/
/
/
• The photo content is displayed in full screen.  
• The photo content is displayed in full screen.  
• To stop the slideshow, press ENTER again.  
4
Press ENTER or (Play) to start a slideshow.  
• The slideshow starts and photo images in the folder  
automatically display one by one. See “Setting up the  
slideshow” (page 82) for setting up the interval time.  
4
5
Press ENTER or (Play) to start a slideshow.  
• The slideshow starts and photo images in the folder  
automatically display one by one.  
• To display a key guide, press INFO.  
• To display a key guide, press INFO.  
5
6
Press ENTER or (Pause) to stop the slideshow.  
While using Photo Player, press A to rotate a photo.  
• The Photo Player goes into “PAUSE”.  
• The displayed image rotates by one quarter clockwise.  
Each time A is pressed, the image rotates; 90º, 180º,  
270º and “Rotate Off”.  
• The Photo Player goes into “PAUSE” (the slideshow is in  
Stop mode).  
Press ENTER again to resume the slideshow.  
• To cancel the slideshow and stop the Photo Player,  
press RETURN or (Stop) during the playback. The  
previous screen returns.  
6
Press ENTER again to resume the slideshow.  
NOTE  
• The selected rotation mode is only effective for the  
image being displayed. The default setting (“Rotate Off”)  
returns when you move and display content on a  
different screen.  
• When you press  
is displayed, the Photo Player goes into “PAUSE”.  
/
/
/
, /while photo content  
Setting up BGM  
Repeating the slideshow  
1
2
3
Press HOME MENU.  
1
While playing a slideshow, press B to select “Repeat  
Once”.  
Select “Home Media Gallery” (  
/
then ENTER).  
• The slideshow being played is repeated.  
Select photo content in the Media Navigator, USB device  
or My Playlist ( then ENTER).  
2
Press B again to cancel the repeat mode (“Repeat Off” is  
selected).  
/
/
/
• The Photo Player launches and photo content is  
displayed in full screen.  
• After playing the currently selected slideshow, the  
Player stops.  
4
5
Press D then select “BGM Setup” from the Tool Menu (  
then ENTER).  
• A “BGM Setup” dialog screen appears.  
/
3
Press HOME MENU to exit the Home Media Gallery.  
Playing the slideshow at random  
Select a Playlist from the list as BGM (  
/
then ENTER).  
1
While playing a slideshow, press C to select “Random On”.  
• A check mark is provided beside the selected Playlist.  
• Random Repeat playback starts.  
• When you select a different Playlist and press ENTER,  
the mark jumps to the new Playlist from the previously  
selected one.  
2
3
Press C again to cancel the random mode (“Random Off”  
is selected).  
Press HOME MENU to exit the Home Media Gallery.  
BGM Setup  
Playlist1  
Playlist2  
Playlist3  
Playlist4  
Playlist5  
20  
0
0
0
0
BGM ON  
OK  
Cancel  
83  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using External Equipment  
12  
5
Select “Bottom-Up” or “Top-Down” in the “Sort Order” box  
Other useful functions  
(
/
then ENTER).  
Search  
XXXX  
You can search the desired items contained in the Folder or  
Contents List by word. Searched results are displayed on the  
screen.  
Sort  
Title  
XXXX  
Select a sorting order.  
Album  
Title  
XXXX  
1
2
3
Press HOME MENU.  
Sort Order  
Date  
Bottom-Up  
Cancel  
2006/11/30  
Play Time  
00:00:59  
Server  
Select “Home Media Gallery” (  
/
then ENTER).  
OK  
XXXXXX  
1/24  
Select the desired folder and/or content in the Media  
Navigator ( then ENTER).  
Tool  
1
D
/
/
/
4
5
Press D then select “Search” from the Tool Menu (  
then ENTER).  
• A “Search” dialog screen appears.  
/
6
7
Select “OK” on the “Sort” dialog screen (  
ENTER).  
• The sorting starts based on your selection and sort  
results are displayed.  
• Even while sorting, you can select content to play. To  
return to the sort screen, press RETURN during  
playback.  
/
then  
Select the “Contains the following” box in “Set the search  
condition:” ( then ENTER).  
/
• The software keyboard appears on the screen.  
Press RETURN to cancel the sort mode.  
XXXX  
Search  
NOTE  
Title  
Set the search condition.  
XXXX  
Album  
Title  
• The “Select a sorting order.” screen can be displayed while  
navigating through the music categories.  
XXXX  
Contains the following:  
Date  
2006/11/30  
Play Time  
00:00:59  
Server  
OK  
Cancel  
XXXXXX  
Adding files to My Playlist  
1/24  
Tool  
1
D
The Home Media Gallery function provides “My Playlist” - a self-  
contained play list that allows you to bookmark your favorite  
movie, music and photo files from the network. You can  
register, edit, and sort up to 100 files in each Playlist List.  
6
7
Enter the word for search on the software keyboard (  
then ENTER).  
/
/
/
1
2
3
4
Press HOME MENU.  
Select “OK” on the software keyboard (  
• The software keyboard disappears.  
/
then ENTER).  
Select “Home Media Gallery” (  
/
then ENTER).  
then ENTER).  
Select the desired music content to add to “My Playlist”  
then ENTER).  
Select “Media Navigator” (  
/
• To cancel the search, select “Cancel” then press ENTER.  
8
Select “OK” on the “Search” dialog screen (  
/
then  
(
/
ENTER).  
5
Press D to open the Tool Menu.  
• A dialog screen appears.  
• The searching starts based on the word entered and  
search results are displayed.  
• Even while searching, you can select content to play. To  
return to the search screen, press RETURN during  
playback.  
Playlist Selection  
Select a Playlist to register  
Playlist1  
Playlist2  
Playlist3  
Playlist4  
Playlist5  
20  
0
0
0
0
9
Press RETURN to cancel the search mode.  
Sort  
You can sort the items contained in the Folder or Contents List.  
OK  
Cancel  
1
2
3
Press HOME MENU.  
Select “Home Media Gallery” (  
/
then ENTER).  
6
Press ENTER.  
Select the desired folder and/or content in the Media  
Navigator ( then ENTER).  
• A check mark is provided in the box at the selected  
Playlist List.  
/
/
/
7
8
Press  
to select “OK”.  
4
Press D then select “Sort” from the Tool Menu (  
ENTER).  
• A “Sort” dialog screen appears.  
/
then  
Press ENTER.  
• The selected content is added to the Playlist.  
9
Press HOME MENU again to exit the Home Media Gallery.  
84  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using External Equipment  
12  
Enter the same figures as used in the media server  
(PC, etc.) you use. For ***, enter 3-digit figures (0 –  
254) that have not been used for network  
connections yet.  
Setup  
The “Setup” is used for “Network Setup”, “Auto Connection  
Setup”, “Default Settings”, “Software Update” and “Home  
Media Gallery Version”.  
5
Press ENTER on the setup item’s box after the entry is  
complete.  
• The screen turns to setup selection mode.  
Setup  
Network Setup  
• Repeat steps 2 to 4 to complete the necessary  
setup.  
Auto Connection Setup  
Default Settings  
Software Update  
Home Media Gallery Version  
6
7
Select “OK” (  
/
/
/
then ENTER).  
• A restart dialog screen appears.  
1/5  
1
Press ENTER again on the dialog screen.  
• The setup finishes.  
• The system restarts then the Home Media Gallery  
screen returns.  
1
2
3
4
Press HOME MENU.  
Select “Home Media Gallery” (  
/
then ENTER).  
“Auto Connection Setup”  
Select “Setup” (  
/
then ENTER).  
When you enjoy content on the network, you can select  
from the following options: “Last Connected Server” and  
“Single Server/USB”. See “Auto Connection Setup” on  
page 88.  
Select “Network Setup”, “Auto Connection Setup”,  
“Default Settings”, “Software Update” and “Home Media  
Gallery Version” (  
/
/
/
then ENTER).  
“Wake on LAN (WOL)” functions to turn the last accessed  
server’s power on if the server is WOL-compliant and is in  
Standby or sleep mode, then display the Media Navigator  
screen. During the WOL is activated, the “Start Server”  
dialog screen displays and a message “The server is  
starting up.” appears. If the server is not WOL-compliant  
or the WOL function fails, the “Start Server” dialog appears  
on the “Server List” screen and a message “Failed to start  
server.” displays on the dialog screen.  
For USB content, the Device List is displayed on the  
screen if you have not checked in the “Single Server/USB”  
box after selecting “Setup” and then “Auto Connection  
Setup”. You can select the desired device and then  
content in it. If you have checked in the box, the list is  
skipped (default setting) and you can see the folder(s) or  
file(s) in the USB device that has a single directory.  
“Network Setup”  
When you select “Network Setup” from the “Setup” menu,  
a submenu is displayed to select “Auto” or “Manual” for  
network connections.  
To automatically set:  
The following setup is effective for “Auto” only. To perform  
the procedure, DHCP on your server or router must be  
valid.  
1
2
3
Select “Automatically acquire IP” then press ENTER.  
Select “Yes” (  
Select “OK”. (  
/
then ENTER).  
then ENTER).  
/
/
/
• A restart dialog screen appears.  
4
Press ENTER again on the dialog screen.  
“Default Settings”  
• The setup finishes.  
Setups you have entered within the Home Media Gallery  
function return to default. When you select “Reset”, a  
confirmation screen “To activate the default settings,  
restart Home Media Gallery.” will appear. Press ENTER to  
reset to default. When you select “Cancel”, the previous  
• The system restarts then the Home Media Gallery  
screen returns.  
To manually set:  
Before setting up, check your media server for IP Address  
and Subnet mask.  
screen displays (  
/
then ENTER).  
1
2
3
Select “Automatically acquire IP” then press ENTER.  
Select “No” ( then ENTER).  
Select the setup item’s box ( then ENTER).  
“Software Update”  
/
Select “Next” to follow the procedure on the subsequent  
screens or “Cancel” to return to the previous screen (  
/
/
/
/
then ENTER). When update is completed, a  
• The screen turns to entry mode for “IP Address” and  
“Subnet mask”.  
• No need to enter “Default Gateway” and “DNS  
Server”.  
confirmation message “To activate the updated software,  
restart Home Media Gallery.” appears. See“Software  
Update” on page 87.  
“Home Media Gallery Version”  
4
Enter the figures using buttons 0 to 9.  
You can confirm the version and copyright information on  
the Home Media Gallery software. Select “OK” to return to  
the previous screen (ENTER).  
• Subnet mask (such as 255.255.255.0)  
Enter the same figures as you checked.  
• IP Address (such as 192.168.201.***)  
8
Press HOME MENU again to exit the Home Media  
Gallery.  
85  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using External Equipment  
12  
Editing files in My Playlist  
• Repeat steps 2 and 3 to move another content.  
4
5
Press RETURN.  
1
2
3
4
Press HOME MENU.  
• A “Playlist” dialog screen appears.  
Select “Home Media Gallery” (  
/
then ENTER).  
Select “OK” (  
/
then ENTER).  
Select “My Playlist” (  
/
then ENTER).  
• The dialog screen disappears and moving content  
finishes.  
• To cancel, select “Cancel” then ENTER.  
Select “Movie Playlist”, “Music Playlist” or “Photo Playlist”  
from the Playlist category (  
• Five playlists are displayed.  
/
then ENTER).  
“Delete from My Playlist”  
• Press D to open the Tool Menu and select an item on  
this screen or next contents list screen (  
/
then  
1
Select “Delete from My Playlist” from the Tool Menu.  
• A dialog screen appears.  
ENTER).  
• Check the appropriate box: “Change Name”, “Move” or  
“Delete from My Playlist” ( then ENTER).  
2
Select “OK” (  
/
then ENTER).  
/
/
/
• The dialog screen disappears and the selected content  
is deleted from My Playlist.  
“Change Name”  
• To cancel, select “Cancel” then ENTER.  
1
2
3
Select “Change Name” from the Tool Menu.  
• A dialog screen appears.  
Playing/displaying files from My Playlist  
Select “Playlist Name” ( then ENTER).  
• The software keyboard appears.  
1
2
3
4
Press HOME MENU.  
Select “Home Media Gallery” (  
/
then ENTER).  
Select “OK” on the software keyboard (  
/
/
/
then  
Select “My Playlist” (  
/
then ENTER).  
ENTER).  
• The software keyboard disappears and “Playlist Name”  
in the “Change Name” dialog screen returns.  
Select the desired Playlist from “Movie Playlist”, “Music  
Playlist” or “Photo Playlist”.  
4
Select “OK” when the new name is entered (  
ENTER).  
• The editing finishes and “Change Name” dialog screen  
disappears.  
/
then  
5
6
Select the desired Playlist List (  
/
then ENTER).  
Select the desired content (  
/
/
/
then ENTER).  
• The selected content is played or displayed.  
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.  
• The new Playlist displays.  
7
Press HOME MENU again to exit the Home Media Gallery.  
Movie Playlist  
Soft Keyboard  
Switching the server  
When one or more servers are connected within the network,  
you can switch between servers.  
Playlist Name  
Playlist1  
20  
0
Title  
Playlist1  
0
1,2,3...  
a,b,c...  
A,B,C...  
@,$,=...  
a
i
b
j
c
k
s
d
l
e
m
u
f
g
o
h
p
x
Delete  
Clear  
0
n
v
0
q
y
r
t
w
Space  
1
2
3
Press HOME MENU.  
z
OK  
Cancel  
Select “Home Media Gallery” (  
/
then ENTER).  
1/5  
1
Tool  
D
Select “Media Navigator” (  
/
then ENTER).  
• The previous server is selected.  
• The on-screen keyboard (“Software Keyboard”) is  
displayed only when you select “Search” or “Change  
Name”.  
4
5
Press D to open the Tool Menu.  
Choose “Select Server” (  
/
then ENTER).  
• The Server List is displayed.  
“Move”  
You can change the listing order of the content registered in  
My Playlist.  
• Pressing RETURN changes the screen to the Home  
Media Gallery.  
1
2
Select “Move” from the Tool Menu.  
6
7
Select the desired server (  
/
then ENTER).  
• The content selected is placed in a yellow box (“Source  
Selection” mode).  
• The screen changes from the selected server to the  
Home Media Gallery.  
Select the desired content (  
/
then ENTER).  
Press HOME MENU again to exit the Home Media Gallery.  
• The selected content is highlighted in the yellow box. A  
specific icon appears on the left (“Destination Selection  
mode”).  
NOTE  
• The Home Media Gallery can memorize previously  
connected servers. When the Media Navigator is launched,  
available servers are automatically searched and connected.  
To switch between connected servers, choose server to  
another one, select “Select Server” from the Tool Menu.  
3
Press  
/
to move the content up or down, then ENTER.  
• The highlight in the yellow box disappears and the  
specific icon returns to the original one.  
86  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using External Equipment  
12  
• If a previously connected server can not be found or if the  
server is in the sleep mode, the server name is dimmed  
(grayed out).  
• In some cases, you may be able to start a media server if it  
supports “Wake On LAN”. Select the server and press ENTER  
to have it transmit a “Wake On LAN” command to the  
Plasma Display.  
6
7
Press ENTER after the following steps are complete:  
“Download”, “Write” and “Verify”  
• A restart dialog screen appears.  
Press ENTER after reading a notice on the screen.  
• The system is restarted then the Home Media Gallery  
screen returns.  
• You cannot select a server unless that media server has been  
set up.  
• Software update finishes.  
Resetting to default  
Setup  
You can reset the setups you have entered within the Home  
Media Gallery function to default (See “Default Settings” on  
page 85).  
Software Update  
To check whether the software needs to be updated or not.  
Home Media Gallery must be connected to a USB device.  
Connect the USB device and press the Next button.  
Current Version: 1.x.xx  
1
2
3
4
Press HOME MENU.  
Select “Setup” (  
Select “Default Settings” (  
Select “Reset” ( then ENTER).  
/
then ENTER).  
then ENTER).  
Next  
Cancel  
1
/
/
• A restart dialog screen appears.  
NOTE  
5
Press ENTER on the dialog screen.  
• On average, it may take 15 minutes or more to complete a  
software update.  
• The setup finishes.  
• The system restarts then the Home Media Gallery screen  
returns.  
Other convenient features  
Screen saver  
During navigation, the screen saver launches automatically  
if no activity is sensed within five minutes.  
• No screen saver is available while a movie or slideshow is  
played.  
• Pressing any key cancels screen saver. When canceled  
with a USB device being connected, connecting operation  
resumes.  
NOTE  
• Pressing INFO to display the Player status or key guide  
before screen saver is activated may cause image retention  
to appear. Do not display the Player status and key  
guide for an extended period of time while playing a  
movie or slideshow.  
Software Update  
Software update is available on the Pioneer website (http://  
www.pioneerelectronics.com). Make sure that you have a  
USB flash memory. First download the software according to  
the guidelines on the website and perform the following  
procedure for update:  
1
2
3
4
Press HOME MENU.  
Select “Home Media Gallery” (  
/
then ENTER).  
Select “Setup” (  
Select “Software Update” (  
• A “Software Update” submenu appears.  
Select “Next” ( then ENTER).  
/
then ENTER).  
/
then ENTER).  
5
/
• The next screen appears. Complete the procedure  
following the guidelines on the screen.  
87  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using External Equipment  
12  
Dialog Screen Message  
“Auto Connection Setup”  
No.  
Message  
Problem  
For extra convenience, you can toggle between the following  
features:  
001  
Content playback failed No details are available  
(001). for the error  
“Last Connected  
Server”  
When you check in the “Last Connected Server”  
box, the Plasma Display accesses the last server  
using WOL (“Wake On LAN”) first as the Media  
Navigator is selected from the Home Media  
Gallery. The Media Navigator displays the last  
server when WOL succeeds, while a server list is  
displayed when WOL fails.  
100  
101  
A communication error No further details are  
occurred (100). available for the error  
No response from the Timeout period reaches  
server (101).  
due to delayed server  
response  
WOL is activated to turn the last accessed server  
On if the server is WOL-compliant and is in  
Standby or sleep mode.  
102  
103  
Disconnected from the Cables are  
network (102).  
disconnected  
Invalid response was  
received from the  
server (103).  
Invalid response from  
the server  
“Single Server/  
USB”  
This function is used only when a USB memory  
device or a single server is connected. You do not  
need this function when a multi-card reader, or two  
or more servers are connected.  
300  
500  
501  
503  
This format is not  
supported (300).  
A file that is not  
supported is selected  
USB:  
• When USB memory is connected, the Devices  
List is skipped as long as you have checked in  
the “Single Server/USB” box. If not, the list may  
be displayed at any time.  
Authorization failed  
(500).  
Failed to obtain  
WMDRM authorization  
Authorization failed  
(501).  
Failed to obtain  
WMDRM authorization  
Media Navigator (Server):  
• When a single server is connected, the Server  
List is skipped as long as you have checked in  
the “Single Server/USB” box. If not, the list may  
be displayed at any time. When the “Last  
Connected Server” box is checked, the other  
server setup option – “Single Server/USB” –  
becomes invalid.  
Authorization failed  
Failed to obtain  
(503). Please check for WMDRM authorization  
trouble in routers,  
hubs, and other  
network devices.  
504  
505  
Authorization failed  
(504). The maximum  
allowed number of  
devices are connected  
to the server.  
Failed to obtain  
WMDRM  
Setup  
Auto Connection Setup  
Authorization failed  
(505). The content  
license is off. Please  
turn on the license  
from the server.  
Failed to obtain  
WMDRM authorization  
Last Connected Server  
Single Server/USB  
OK  
Cancel  
• The message consists of “Error”, “Warning” and “Information” and is  
displayed for 5 seconds.  
1
Displaying pictures in the Home Media Gallery for an  
extended period may cause an after-image.  
88  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using External Equipment  
12  
MAC (Media Access Control) Address  
Glossary  
An address attached to the port of any network device with an  
IP address. The MAC address is expressed as  
“00:e0:36:01:23:xx” and cannot be changed.  
Default Gateway  
Default gateway is a node on a computer network that serves  
as an access point to another network. A default gateway (such  
as a computer and router) is used to forward all traffic that is  
not addressed to a station within the local subnet.  
Mass Storage Class devices  
The standard provides an interface to a variety of storage  
devices, such as USB flash memory and digital cameras.  
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Server  
Provides a mechanism to allocate IP addresses to client hosts.  
In most cases, a broadband router serves as a DHCP server in  
a home network.  
PlaysForSure  
This unit incorporates PlaysForSure. “PlaysForSure” is a new  
logo program from Microsoft Corporation. You can check for  
the PlaysForSure logo at various online stores. Where you see  
the PlaysForSure logo, you can be sure that the digital media  
you are purchasing (music, video, pictures) will play on this  
unit.  
DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance)  
The DLNA authorized logo makes it easy for consumers to  
recognize products that meet the new standard for home  
network PCs and other digital devices, as set down in the DLNA  
Guidelines for interoperability. This allows music, video, etc. to  
be enjoyed from various devices over a home network. This unit  
is compatible with music, photo and video content, and is  
based on the DLNA Interoperability Guidelines v1.0. This unit  
can be used to playback music, photos and video stored on a  
DLNA-compatible server connected through a LAN cable.  
Subnet mask  
Used when IP addresses are broken into several parts. It is  
expressed as “255.255.255.0”. In most cases, the Subnet mask  
is automatically assigned by the DHCP server.  
USB (Universal Serial Bus)  
USB provides a serial bus standard for connecting devices,  
usually to computers such as PCs. The Plasma Display  
supports the Mass Storage Class.  
Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is dedicated to the  
simplified sharing of digital content, such as digital music,  
photos and video among networked consumer electronics (CE)  
and PCs. By establishing a platform of interoperability based  
on open industry standards, DLNA delivers technical design  
guidelines that companies can use to develop digital home  
products that share content through wired or wireless  
networks in the home.  
Windows Media Connect  
Microsoft Windows Media Connect is a new technology to  
distribute music, photos and video stored on a PC with  
Windows XP installed to a stereo system of TV. Using this  
technology you can playback files stored on the PC from  
various devices wherever you like in your home.  
DNS (Domain Name Service) Server  
DNS Server is a server that determines the name of network-  
computer within the Internet. The server functions to exchange  
IP address to the hostname, hostname to the IP address.  
Windows Media DRM  
Windows Media DRM is copyright protection technology  
developed by Microsoft Corporation. It enables content  
providers to distribute over the Internet music, video and other  
digital media content in a protected, encrypted file format.  
Ethernet  
A frame-based computer networking technology for local area  
networks (LANs). The Plasma Display supports 100BASE-TX.  
IP (Internet Protocol) Address  
A unique number that devices use in order to identify and  
communicate with each other on a network utilizing the  
Internet Protocol standard, such as “192.168.1.xxx”. No  
duplicate numbers are allowed within the network.  
LAN Cable  
A cable that has an 8-pin modular plug on each end and is  
different from a telephone plug which has 4 pins. A straight  
cable is used when connecting the Plasma Display to a home  
network via a hub. A cross-over cable is used when connecting  
directly to a PC. Use category 5 (CAT-5) LAN cables.  
89  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Useful Remote Control Features  
Useful Remote Control Features  
13  
Learning function of the remote control  
Presetting manufacturer codes to  
control other devices  
unit  
You can operate the connected AV products (AV Receiver,  
Cable Box, SAT tuner, VCR, DVD, DVD recorder, LD) using the  
remote control’s learning function. The remote control can  
memorize other remote control’s codes.  
Presetting manufacturer codes  
1
Slide the Mode switch to match the type of device to be  
preset.  
2 cm to 5 cm (0.8 inches to 2.0 inches)  
2
Press EDIT/LEARN and 1 at the same time.  
• The LED flashes.  
3
Press 0 – 9 to enter the manufacturer code. See page 92.  
• Preset mode is finished when the LED blinks Off.  
Library Search  
In the event that the device code for a particular target unit is  
unknown, cycle through the available codes for that type of  
device. Sample the functions from each code in order to find  
the code that properly operates the target device.  
Remote control of  
AV product  
Remote control  
(Supplied accessory)  
1
Slide the Mode switch to match the type of device to be  
preset.  
Using the learning function  
2
Press EDIT/LEARN and 3 at the same time.  
1
Slide the Mode switch to match the type of device to be  
learned.  
• The LED indicator flashes and the remote control unit  
enters the Library Search programming mode.  
2
Press EDIT/LEARN and 2 at the same time.  
3
4
5
Press either SOURCE POWER, PLAY, 1 or CH+ to sample  
the selected code.  
• The LED flashes.  
3
4
Press a button to be learned.  
• The LED lights up.  
• For the functions that can be learned, see pages 97 to  
100.  
• When the device’s remote is memorized, the LED  
flashes.  
If the code is missing, press  
code or return to the previous code and repeat step 3.  
/
to advance to the next  
Press ENTER when the code that properly operates the  
target device is found.  
• All the available buttons for the selected mode are  
programmed to the remote control. The remote control  
unit returns to normal operation (LED lights for one  
second to confirm addition).  
Press EDIT/LEARN again to exit the Learn mode.  
NOTE  
Delete Learning  
You can delete a learned code by either overwriting it with a  
new code on the same button or performing the procedure  
below.  
• To exit the Learn mode before it is complete, press EDIT/  
LEARN again.  
• If the Mode switch selection is changed when EDIT/LEARN  
and 2 are pressed (the LED is flashing), the Learn session is  
canceled.  
1
Press EDIT/LEARN and 2 at the same time.  
• If the Mode switch selection is changed when a button to be  
learned is pressed after EDIT/LEARN and 2 have been  
pressed (the LED lights up), the Learn session is not  
canceled and the selected mode and button remain  
effective.  
• If no operation is performed for more than one minute after  
having pressed EDIT/LEARN and 2 (the LED is flashing), the  
Learn session is canceled.  
• The LED indicator flashes and the remote control unit  
enters the Learning mode.  
2
Press and hold TV a for more than two seconds.  
• The remote control unit starts deleting all learned codes  
in the selected mode (marked by a lit LED).  
• When completed, the LED blinks Off and the remote  
control unit returns to normal operation.  
• If a button to be learned is pressed after having pressed  
EDIT/LEARN and 2 (the LED is lit), the Learn session is  
canceled in 30 seconds and the LED restarts blinking again.  
• Code transmission finishes in approximately two seconds.  
Do not interrupt it halfway. Wait until the LED flashes again.  
• When using any of the receiver buttons (a, INPUT, or  
VOL +/–), the learned manufacturer code remains the same  
regardless of the Mode switch position or even if the switch  
is shifted to a different position.  
90  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Useful Remote Control Features  
13  
Manufacturing Reset  
All learned and preset codes can be returned to the factory  
defaults regardless of the mode.  
1
Press EDIT/LEARN and TV a at the same time. The Mode  
switch setting is ignored.  
• The LED indicator flashes and the remote control unit  
enters the Manufacturing Reset mode.  
2
Press D (yellow) to reset the remote control.  
• The manufacturing reset is complete. The LED flashes  
for one second then the remote control unit returns to  
normal operation.  
NOTE  
• To exit the Edit mode before it is complete, press EDIT/  
LEARN again.  
• If the Mode switch selection is changed when in the Edit  
mode, the Edit session is canceled.  
• If no operation is performed within one minute, the Edit  
session is canceled.  
• When you enter an unlisted code, the LED flashes  
repeatedly.  
• If the tables on pages 92 to 96 do not include your device’s  
manufacturer or the remote control does not work, use the  
Learn mode.  
• The initial mode is “PIONEER”.  
• When using any of the receiver buttons (a, INPUT, or  
VOL +/–) to cancel the Learn mode, follow the procedure  
with the Mode switch set to “TV”. You cannot cancel the  
mode otherwise.  
91  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Useful Remote Control Features  
13  
Programming codes  
CABLE  
Brand  
Codes  
Brand  
Codes  
Brand  
Codes  
Brand  
Codes  
ABC  
0003 0008 0014 0011 General Instrument  
0014 0011  
1327  
Panasonic  
Panther  
Paragon  
Philips  
0000 0008 0107 0021 Sony  
1006 1506 1606  
0021  
Global  
0637  
Sprucer  
0017  
Americast  
Amino  
0899  
GoldStar  
Hamlin  
Hitachi  
i3 Micro  
Jerrold  
0144  
0000  
Starcom  
0003 0014  
0276  
1602 1822  
0014  
0009 0273  
0014 0011 0154  
1602  
1305 0317  
Supercable  
Bell & Howell  
Bell South  
Pioneer  
1877 0877 0144 0533 Supermax  
0883  
0899  
Thomson  
Tocom  
1256  
0023 0260 1021  
0000  
Birmingham Cable Communications 0276  
0476 0810 0276 0003 Pulsar  
0012  
British Telecom  
Clearmaster  
ClearMax  
Cleartron  
Coolmax  
0003  
PVP Stereo Visual Matrix 0003  
Torx  
0003  
0012 0014 0011  
0008  
0883  
KNC  
Quasar  
RadioShack  
RCA  
0000  
Toshiba  
Trans PX  
Tristar  
0000  
0883  
LG  
0144  
0883  
0276  
1327  
Memorex  
Motorola  
0000  
1256 0021  
0279 0273  
0011  
0883  
0883  
1376 0476 0810 0276 Regal  
TS  
0003  
Daeryung  
Digeo  
1877 0877 0477 0008  
Rembrandt  
United Cable  
V2  
0003  
1187 1254 0014 1106  
1187  
0637  
0476  
0637  
0476  
Multitech  
MultiVision  
Myrio  
0883  
Runco  
0000  
0883  
Digi  
0012  
Samsung  
0000 0144  
Viewmaster  
0883  
Director  
1602 1822  
0003  
Scientific Atlanta  
1877 0877 0477 0008 ViewmaxPro  
1544  
Dumont  
NTL  
Vision  
0883  
0017  
1602  
0011  
Gehua  
Optimus  
0021  
Sejin  
Vortex View  
Zenith  
0883  
General Instrument  
0476 0810 0276 0003 Pace  
1877 0237 0008  
Signature  
0000 0525 0899  
SATELLITE  
Brand  
Codes  
Brand  
Codes  
Brand  
Codes  
Brand  
Codes  
AlphaStar  
Amino  
0772  
Fortec Star  
Galaxis  
1550  
Legend  
0269  
Realistic  
0052  
1615  
0270  
LG  
1226 1414 1750  
0724 0722  
1551  
Samsung  
1377 1142 1276 1108  
1109 0270 1243 1442  
1609  
BeauSAT  
Century  
1586  
GE  
0392 0566  
0869  
Magnavox  
MegaSat  
Memorex  
Mitsubishi  
Motorola  
NEC  
0856  
General Instrument  
GOI  
Channel Master  
Chaparral  
Coolsat  
0212  
0775 1775  
1246  
0724 0269  
0749  
Sanyo  
SKY  
1219  
0053 0209 0216  
1806  
Goodmans  
Gradiente  
Hisense  
Hitachi  
0856 1856 0099  
0639 1639 1640  
0869  
0856  
0869 0856  
0102 0178 1270  
0099  
Sony  
Crossdigital  
Digiturk  
1109  
1535  
Star Choice  
Star Trak  
STS  
1076  
0819 1250  
0238  
Netsat  
0180  
DirecTV  
1377 0392 0566 0639 Homecable  
Next Level  
OctalTV  
Panasonic  
0869  
0210  
HTS  
0775 1775  
0749 1749 1442  
1505  
Tivo  
1142 1442 1443 1444  
1538  
1639 1142 0247 0749  
1749 0724 0819 1856  
1076 1108 0099 1109  
1392 1414 1442 1443  
1444 1538 1609 1640  
1750  
Hughes  
0247 0701 0152  
0647 1551 1807  
0724  
Hughes Network Systems 1142 0749 1749 1442 Pansat  
Toshiba  
0749 1749 0790 0819  
0082 1285  
1392 1640  
1806  
Paysat  
Philips  
1443 1444 1538 1750  
Humax  
iLo  
1790  
1142 0749 1749 0724 UltimateTV  
1535  
Ultrasat  
Uniden  
0819 0856 1076 0722  
0099 1442  
0329 1442  
0392 0566  
1535  
Dish Network System 1505 1005 0775 1170 Innova  
IQ  
1505 1005 0775 1775 IQ Prism  
1612 Janeil  
1505 1005 0775 0159 Jerrold  
0099  
0724 0722 0052 0074  
0076 0238  
1535  
0210  
Pioneer  
Proscan  
Proton  
1775  
Dishpro  
Eastern  
Echostar  
0210  
US Digital  
USDTV  
Voom  
0152  
1535  
0869  
RadioShack  
RCA  
0869  
0869  
JVC  
0775 1170 1775  
1631  
0392 0566 0855 0143 Zenith  
1392  
0856 1856  
0269 0280 1170 1775  
0775 1775  
Expressvu  
Lava  
92  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Useful Remote Control Features  
13  
VCR  
Brand  
Codes  
Brand  
Codes  
Brand  
Codes  
Brand  
Codes  
ABS  
1972  
Craig  
0271  
Go Video  
0240 0432 0526 0649 LG  
0663 1137 1150  
0037 0045 0042 0209  
0038 0040 1037 1137  
1972  
Admiral  
Adventura  
Aiko  
0048 0209 0479  
0000  
Crown  
0072 0278 0020  
Curtis Mathes  
0060 0035 0162 0041 GoldHand  
0072  
Linksys  
0278  
GoldStar  
0037 0209 0038 0225 Lloyd’s  
0000 0208  
0760 1035  
0240  
Aiwa  
0037 0000 0124 0307 Cybernex  
CyberPower  
0041 0061 0106 0175 Cyrus  
0226 1137 1237  
Loewe  
0037 0081  
1972  
Goodmans  
0037 0000 0072 0278 Logik  
0240 0072  
0479 1137  
Akai  
0081  
0020 0062  
Lunatron  
1137  
Daewoo  
0045 0104 0278 0020 Gradiente  
0046 0210 0212 0561 Graetz  
0000 0008  
Luxor  
0048 0104 0043 0046  
0062 0106  
0242  
Akiba  
0072  
0240 0104 0041  
0081 0104 0046  
0037 0000 0072  
Akura  
0271  
Granada  
Grandin  
Grundig  
LXI  
0037  
1137 1278  
0072  
Alba  
0209 0072 0278 0020 Dansai  
M Electronic  
0000 0038  
Alienware  
Allegro  
1972  
1137  
0020  
0278  
0035  
0479  
0000  
Daytron  
De Graaf  
Decca  
Dell  
0020  
0081 0072 0034 0207 Magnasonic  
0593 1278  
0042 0166  
0081 0000  
1972  
Magnavox  
0035 0039 0081 0000  
0149 0563 0593 1781  
0240  
0226 0378  
0037  
Ambassador  
America Action  
American High  
Amoisonic  
Amstrad  
Anam  
Hanseatic  
Haojie  
0240  
Magnin  
Manesth  
Marantz  
Marta  
Denon  
DirecTV  
Dual  
0042  
Harley Davidson  
Harman/Kardon  
Harwood  
0000  
0045 0072  
0739  
0081 0038 0075  
0072  
0035 0081 0062  
0037  
0041  
0162 0037 0240 0278 Dumont  
0081 0000 0104 0105 HCM  
0072  
Matsui  
0209 0208  
Durabrand  
Dynatech  
Elbe  
0039 0038  
Headquarter  
0046  
Matsushita  
0035 0162 0226 0227  
1162  
0226 1037  
0162 0226  
0072  
Anam National  
Anitech  
0000  
Hewlett Packard  
HI-Q  
1972  
0038  
0047  
Media Center PC  
MEI  
1972  
ASA  
0037 0081  
0240  
Elcatech  
0072  
Hinari  
0240 0072 0208  
0035  
Asha  
Electrohome  
Electrophonic  
Emerex  
0037 0043  
Hitachi  
0037 0240 0000 0042 Memorex  
0041 0065 0082 0089  
0105 0166 0235 0292  
1037  
0035 0162 0037 0048  
0039 0047 0240 0000  
0104 0209 0046 0307  
0479 1037 1048 1162  
1237 1262  
Asuka  
0037  
0037  
Audiovox  
Awa  
0037 0278  
0043  
0032  
Emerson  
0035 0037 0184 0240  
0045 0000 0121 0043  
0209 0002 0278 0208  
0061 0212 0479 0561  
Baird  
0000 0104 0041  
0072 0278 0020  
0240  
Howard Computers  
HP  
1972  
Basic Line  
Beaumark  
Bell & Howell  
Blaupunkt  
BPL  
1972  
Memphis  
Metronic  
Metz  
0072  
HughesNetworkSystems 0042 0739  
0081  
0104  
0593 1278 1479 1593 Humax  
0739  
1972  
0072  
1972  
0000  
0081  
0162 0037 0227  
0240 0043 0061  
0240  
0162 0034 0226 0227 ESA  
1137  
Hush  
MGA  
0046  
0041  
ESC  
0240 0278  
Hypson  
iBUYPOWER  
Imperial  
Interfunk  
ITT  
MGN Technology  
Microsoft  
Mind  
Brandt Electronique  
Broksonic  
EverFocus  
1346  
1972  
0184 0121 0209 0002 Ferguson  
0041  
1972  
Fidelity  
Finlandia  
Finlux  
0000  
Minolta  
0042 0105  
0479 1479 1815  
0209 0072 0278  
0037  
Bush  
0081 0104  
0240 0104 0041 0046 Mitsubishi  
0081 0067 0043 0041  
0061 0075 0173 0214  
0242 0443 0807  
0035 0048  
Calix  
0081 0000 0042 0104  
0105  
0106  
Canon  
Capehart  
Carver  
Catron  
CCE  
0035 1143  
0020  
ITV  
0037 0278  
Firstline  
0037 0045 0043 0209 Jensen  
0041  
Motorola  
0081  
JVC  
0045 0067 0041 0008 MTC  
0240 0000  
0072  
0020  
Fisher  
Frontech  
Fuji  
0047 0104 0046  
0020  
0206 0207 0366 1162 Multitech  
0000 0072  
0072 0278  
0000  
Murphy  
Myryad  
NAD  
0000  
1707  
CGE  
0035 0033  
0045 0000 0366  
Kaisui  
KEC  
0072  
0081  
Changhong  
Cimline  
Cineral  
CineVision  
Citizen  
Clatronic  
Colt  
0048 0081  
0072  
Fujitsu  
Funai  
0037 0278  
0209 0106  
0067 0041 0038  
0072  
0104 0058  
0000 0593 1335 1593 Kendo  
National  
NEC  
0226  
0278  
Garrard  
Gateway  
GE  
0000  
Kenwood  
KLH  
0035 0037 0048 0104  
0067 0041 0038 0008  
0040 0050 0082 0206  
0457  
1137  
1195 1196 1972  
0037 0278 1278  
0020  
0060 0035 0240 0065 Kodak  
0035 0037  
0043 0041  
0072  
Kolin  
0202 0226 0760 0761  
0807 1035 1060  
0081  
0072  
Korpel  
Lenco  
Leyco  
Neckermann  
Nesco  
0081  
Condor  
Craig  
0020  
GEC  
0278  
0072  
0037 0047 0240 0072 General  
0045 0020 0366  
0072  
Newave  
0037  
93  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Useful Remote Control Features  
13  
VCR  
Brand  
Codes  
Brand  
Codes  
Brand  
Codes  
Brand  
Codes  
Nikko  
0037  
0034  
1972  
0240  
Pye  
0081  
0060  
0046  
0046  
SEG  
0240  
Tensai  
Thomas  
Thomson  
Thorn  
0000  
Nikon  
Qisheng  
Quarter  
Quartz  
SEI  
0081  
0000  
Niveus Media  
Noblex  
Nokia  
Seleco  
Semp  
0041  
0060 0067 0041 0202  
0104 0041  
0618 0636 0739 1337  
1996  
0045  
0240 0104 0041 0046 Quasar  
0106  
0035 0162 0077 1035 Sensory Science  
0649 1155  
0020  
Tivo  
Sentra  
Sharp  
1162  
Nordmende  
Northgate  
Oceanic  
Olympus  
Onkyo  
0041  
Quelle  
0081  
0048 0209 0062 0807 TMK  
0240 0208  
0081 0045 0042 0067  
0043 0209 0041 1996  
1972 1145 1008 0845  
0377 0366 0212 0210  
0057 0008  
0037 0240  
1972  
1972  
Radiola  
RadioShack  
Radix  
0081  
Toshiba  
0848 1048  
0000  
0000 0041  
0035 0226  
0222  
0000 1037  
0037  
Shinco  
Shintom  
Shogun  
0104 0072  
0240  
Randex  
0037  
Optimus  
1062 0162 0037 0048 RCA  
0104 0058 0432 0593  
1048 1162 1262  
0060 0035 0240 0000 Siemens  
0037 0081 0104  
0037  
0042 0149 0077 0105  
0106 0065 0202 0226  
Silva  
Totevision  
Touch  
Singer  
0045 0072  
0081  
Optonica  
Orion  
0062  
0058 0760 0761 0807 Sinudyne  
Solavox  
0035 0037 0048 0047 Sonic Blue  
Triumph  
Uher  
0208  
0184 0121 0209 0002  
0208 0479 1479 1815 Realistic  
0037 0000 0072  
0020  
0240  
0880 1035 1060  
0614 0616 1137  
0046 0062  
0037  
Unitech  
Universum  
0240  
Osaki  
Sonolor  
Sontec  
Sony  
0037 0081 0240 0000  
0106  
0000 0104 0046 0062  
Otto Versand  
Palladium  
Panasonic  
0081  
ReplayTV  
Rex  
0614 0616  
0041  
0037 0041 0072  
0035 0032 0033 0000 Vector  
0045  
1062 0035 0162 0077 Ricavision  
1972  
Vector Research  
0038 0040  
0067 0041 0008  
0045 0040 0061  
0037  
0011 0022 0034 0275  
Ricoh  
Rio  
0034  
Victor  
0225 0226 0227 0246  
0378 0616 1035 1162  
1262  
0636 1032 1232 1546  
1137  
Video Concepts  
Videomagic  
Videosonic  
Viewsonic  
Villain  
1702 1703 1896 1972  
Roadstar  
Runco  
0037 0240 0072 0278 Stack 9  
1972  
0042  
0000  
0000  
Pathe Marconi  
Penney  
0041  
0039  
STS  
0240  
0035 0037 0240 0042 Saba  
0041 0206 0207  
0209 0208  
Sunstar  
Suntronic  
1972  
Saisho  
Salora  
0000  
0038 0040 1035 1237  
0042 0065 0105  
0000  
Pentax  
Perdio  
Philco  
0043 0046 0075 0106 Sylvania  
0443  
0035 0081 0000 0043 Voodoo  
1972  
Wards  
0060 0035 0048 0047  
0081 0240 0000 0042  
0072 0149 0062 0212  
0760  
0593 1593 1781  
0000 0593 1593  
1972  
0035 0000 0209 0038 Sampo  
0037 0048  
Symphonic  
Samsung  
0240 0045 0210 0212 Systemax  
0432 0649 0663 0739 Tagar Systems  
0226 0479 0561  
0035 0081 0000 0062  
0226 0563 0593 0618  
0739 1081 1181 1266  
0081  
Philips  
1972  
0760 1014  
0048 0039  
Tandy  
0000 0104  
0037 0000  
Wharfedale  
0593  
Sanky  
Tashiko  
White Westinghouse 0209 0072  
Phonola  
Pilot  
Sansui  
0000 0067 0209 0041 Tatung  
0082 0271 0479 1479  
0047 0240 0104 0046 Teac  
0159 0372  
0081 0045 0000 0067 XR-1000  
Yamaha  
0000 0041 0278 0307 Yamishi  
0035 0000 0072  
0041 0038  
0072  
0037  
0041 0008 0366  
Pioneer  
0081 0042 0067 0058 Sanyo  
0168 0206 0235 1337  
Yokan  
Yoko  
0072  
0526 0593  
0020  
Polk Audio  
Portland  
Profitronic  
Proline  
0081  
SBR  
0081  
Tec  
0240 0020  
0039 0033 0000 0209  
0034 0479 1137 1139  
1479  
0020  
Schaub Lorenz  
Schneider  
Scott  
0000 0104 0041  
0081 0000 0072  
0184 0045 0121 0043  
0210 0212  
Technics  
Teco  
0035 0162 0226 0246 Zenith  
0035 0037 0048 0041  
0038 0040  
0240  
0000  
Proscan  
0060 0202 0760 0761  
Teknika  
0035 0037 0000  
0041  
ZT Group  
1972  
Sears  
0035 0037 0047 0000 Teleavia  
0042 0104 0046 0057 Telefunken  
1060  
0072  
0039  
Protec  
Pulsar  
0041  
Tenosal  
0072  
0105 1237  
94  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Useful Remote Control Features  
13  
PVR  
Brand  
Codes  
Brand  
Codes  
Brand  
Codes  
Brand  
Codes  
ABS  
1972  
HP  
1972  
Niveus Media  
Northgate  
Panasonic  
Philips  
1972  
Systemax  
Tagar Systems  
Tivo  
1972  
Alienware  
CyberPower  
Dell  
1972  
HughesNetworkSystems 0739  
1972  
1972  
1972  
Humax  
0739  
1972  
1972  
1972  
1972  
1972  
1972  
0616  
0618 0636 0739  
1008 1972  
1972  
1972  
Hush  
0618 0739  
0880  
Toshiba  
DirecTV  
0739  
iBUYPOWER  
Linksys  
RCA  
Touch  
EverFocus  
Gateway  
1346  
ReplayTV  
Sonic Blue  
Sony  
0614 0616  
0614 0616  
0636 1972  
1972  
Viewsonic  
Voodoo  
1972  
1195 1196 1972  
1972  
Media Center PC  
Microsoft  
Mind  
1972  
Hewlett Packard  
Howard Computers  
ZT Group  
1972  
1972  
Stack 9  
DVD  
Brand  
Codes  
Brand  
Codes  
Brand  
Codes  
Brand  
Codes  
Acoustic Solutions  
Adcom  
Advent  
Afreey  
0730 1242  
CineVision  
Citizen  
0876 0833 0869  
Gateway  
GE  
1073 1077 1158 1194 Landel  
0522 0815 0717 Lasonic  
0744 0715 0741 0783 Lecson  
0826  
1094  
1277  
0798 1173  
1533  
1016  
Classic  
Clatronic  
Coby  
1385  
Go Video  
0698  
1165  
Lenoxx  
LG  
1127  
0833 0869 1044 1075  
1099 1144 1148 1158  
1304 1443 1730  
1071 1072  
0741  
Aiwa  
0641  
0778 0852 1086 1107  
1165 1177 1351  
0831  
0591 0741 0801 0869  
1526  
Akai  
0695 0770 0899 1089  
Alba  
0672 0539 0717  
0790  
Craig  
Go Vision  
GoldStar  
LiteOn  
1058 1158 1416 1440  
0511 0741  
0783  
Alco  
Curtis Mathes  
CyberHome  
1087  
Loewe  
Allegro  
Altacom  
0869  
0816 0874 1019 1023 Goodmans  
0790 1004  
0699 0769  
0490 0651  
0717  
Logix  
1224  
GPX  
Lunatron  
Magnavox  
0741  
1024 1117 1129 1502  
Amphion Media Works 0872 1176 1245  
Gradiente  
Greenhill  
0503 0539 0646 0675  
0821 1268 1506  
0782 1159  
0539  
1537  
1074  
AMW  
0872 1176 1245  
Cydectin  
Apex Digital  
0672 0717 0755 0794 Daewoo  
0796 0797 0830 1004  
0784 0705 0770 0833 Grundig  
0539 0695 0705  
1169  
Malata  
GVG  
Marantz  
Matsui  
0869 1169 1172 1234  
1242 1441 1443  
0770  
H & B  
1421  
0672  
1020 1056 1061 1100  
Arcam  
0732  
Dansai  
Dantax  
Daytek  
Harman/Kardon  
Hitachi  
Hiteker  
iLo  
0582 0702  
McIntosh  
1533 1273 1373  
0690 0695 0831 1270  
0690  
Aspire Digital  
Audiologic  
Audiovox  
1168 1407  
0736  
1089  
0573 0664 0695 1247 Memorex  
0872  
0672  
Metronic  
Microsoft  
Minato  
0790 1041 1071 1072 Decca  
0770  
1348 1472  
0717 1472  
0522  
Denon  
0490 0634  
0778 1107 1316  
1407 1455  
1316 1609 1610  
Initial  
0752  
1121 1122  
1071 1072 1193  
0655 0662  
1224  
Axion  
Denver  
Innovative Technology 1542  
Minowa  
Mintek  
1165  
B & K  
Desay  
Integra  
IRT  
0571 0627  
0839 0717 1472  
0752  
BBK  
Diamond Vision  
0783  
1078  
0702  
1016  
0695  
1423  
Mirror  
Bel Canto Design  
Bellagio  
Blaupunkt  
Blue Parade  
Broksonic  
Bush  
1571  
Dick Smith Electronics 0833 1730  
Jaton  
JBL  
Mitsubishi  
MixSonic  
Momitsu  
MTlogic  
Mustek  
1521 0521  
1130 1611  
1082  
1245  
Digitor  
Digitrex  
Digix  
0690  
0717  
0672 1056  
1272  
Jensen  
JMB  
JSI  
0571  
1265  
0695 0868 1419  
0690  
Disney  
DiViDo  
DSE  
0675 1270  
0705  
0730 1730  
0894  
JVC  
0558 0623 0867 1164 Myryad  
Byd:sign  
0872  
0833 1730  
1068 1085  
1127  
NAD  
0591 0692 0741  
1222  
1275 1602  
1049 1051  
0790  
California Audio Labs 0490  
Cambridge Soundworks 0690  
Dual  
jWin  
Nakamichi  
NEC  
Durabrand  
DVD2000  
ECC  
Kawasaki  
Kenwood  
KLH  
0785 0869  
0717  
Cary Audio Design  
CAVS  
1477  
0521  
0490 0534 0682 0737 Nesa  
1057  
0730  
0717 0790 1020 1149 Next Base  
0826  
Celestial  
Centrex  
1020  
Emerson  
Enterprise  
ESA  
0591 0675 0821 1268  
0591  
NexxTech  
0711 0719 0720 0721 Nintaus  
1402  
1261  
0672 1004  
1577  
Konka  
Koss  
1051  
Centrios  
Changhong  
Cinea  
1443  
0651 0896 1423  
1421  
Norcent  
1003 0872 1107 1265  
1457  
0627 1061  
0831  
Fintec  
1169  
Kreisen  
Krell  
Fisher  
0670  
1498  
Olidata  
Onkyo  
0672  
Cinego  
1399  
Funai  
0675 1268 1334  
Lafayette  
1369  
0503 0627 0792  
95  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Useful Remote Control Features  
13  
DVD  
Brand  
Codes  
Brand  
Codes  
Brand  
Codes  
Brand  
Codes  
Oppo  
1224  
Proscan  
ProVision  
Qwestar  
RCA  
0522  
0778  
0651  
Shinco  
0717  
Toshiba  
0503 0695 1045 1154  
OptoMedia Electronics 0896  
Shinsonic  
Sigma Designs  
0533 0839  
0674  
TRANS-continents  
Tredex  
0831 1165  
Orion  
1419  
0799 0800 0803 0804  
Oritron  
Otic  
0651  
0522 0571 0717 0790 Slim Art  
0784  
TYT  
0705  
0826  
SM Electronic  
0690 0730  
0869 1099  
Umax  
0690  
0822 1022 1132 1193  
0698  
Pacific  
Palsonic  
Panasonic  
0831  
Recco  
Reoc  
Sonic Blue  
Sony  
Universum  
0591  
0672 0852  
0752  
0533 1533 0864 1033 Urban Concepts  
0503  
0503 0490 0632 0703 Revoy  
0699  
US Logic  
Venturer  
Vialta  
0839  
1069 1070 1431 1432  
1433 1548  
1122  
Rio  
0869  
0790  
1010 1011 1362 1462  
1490 1762  
RJTech  
Roadstar  
Rotel  
1360  
Sova  
1509  
peeKTon  
Philco  
1224  
1051  
Sungale  
Superscan  
SVA  
1074 1342 1532  
0821  
Viewmaster  
Vizio  
1224  
0690 0790  
0623 1178  
0823 1004  
0698 0752 1501  
1064 1226  
Philips  
0503 0539 0646 0675 Rowa  
0717 0860 1105  
0675 0821 1268  
0675 1268  
0894  
Vocopro  
Wesder  
Wintel  
1027  
Sampo  
Sylvania  
0699  
0854 1158 1260 1267  
Samsung  
0490 0573 0744 0820 Symphonic  
1130  
1354  
1024  
0899 1044 1075  
0695  
PianoDisc  
Pioneer  
TAG McLaren  
Tatung  
Xbox  
0522  
0525 0571 0631 0632 Sansui  
Sanyo  
1020 1061 1086 1245 Schneider  
0770  
XMS  
0770  
0670 0695 0873  
0783  
Teac  
0571 0717 0692 0790 Xoro  
1173  
1475 1476 1571  
Polaroid  
0809 0833  
0490 0703  
0730  
Xwave  
1001  
Schwaiger  
Semp  
0752  
Technics  
Yamada  
0872 1004 1056 1158  
1316 1478 1480 1482  
Polk Audio  
Portland  
Prima  
0539  
0503  
Technosonic  
Techwood  
1416  
0770  
Sensory Science  
Sharp  
1158  
0692  
Yamaha  
Yamakawa  
Zenith  
0490 0539 0545 0817  
1016  
0630 0675 0752 1256 Tedelex  
0690  
0872  
Primare  
Princeton  
Proceed  
0886 1467 1618  
0674  
Terapin  
1031  
0503 0591 0741 0869  
1419  
1117  
Sharper Image  
Sherwood  
Theta Digital  
0571  
Zeus  
0784  
1265  
0672  
0633 0770 1043 1077 Thomson  
0522  
Zoece  
DVD-R  
Brand  
Codes  
Brand  
Codes  
Brand  
Codes  
Brand  
Codes  
Apex Digital  
Aspire Digital  
Coby  
1056  
Funai  
Gateway  
Go Video  
H & B  
iLo  
0675 1334  
Loewe  
0741  
Sensory Science  
Sharp  
1158  
1168  
1073 1158 1194  
Magnavox  
0646 1506  
1730  
0630 0675 1419  
1033 1069 1070 1431  
1432 1433  
0675  
1086  
0741 1158 1304 1730 Mustek  
Sony  
CyberHome  
Denon  
1129 1502  
0490  
1421  
Panasonic  
0490 1010 1011  
0646 1158  
0631 1475 1476  
1086  
1348  
Philips  
Pioneer  
Polaroid  
RCA  
Sylvania  
Yamada  
Zenith  
Dick Smith Electronics 1730  
JVC  
1164 1275  
1421  
1056 1158 1416  
0741  
Digitrex  
DSE  
1056  
1730  
0675  
Kreisen  
LG  
0741  
0522  
Emerson  
LiteOn  
1158 1416 1440  
Samsung  
0490  
LD  
Brand  
Codes  
Brand  
Codes  
Brand  
Codes  
Brand  
Codes  
Aiwa  
0203  
Magnavox  
Marantz  
Mitsubishi  
NAD  
0194 0217 0241  
0064 0194  
0059 0241  
0059  
Philips  
0064 0194  
0059 0023  
0194  
Sega  
0023  
Carver  
0064 0194 0323  
0059 0172 0241  
0023  
Pioneer  
Sharp  
0001  
Denon  
Polk Audio  
Quasar  
Sony  
0193 0201 0270  
0204  
Disco Vision  
Funai  
0204  
Technics  
Telefunken  
Theta Digital  
Victor  
0203  
Nagsmi  
NEC  
0059  
Realistic  
Renaissance  
Salora  
0203  
0059  
GoldStar  
Harman/Kardon  
Hitachi  
0172  
0286  
0323  
0194  
0194  
Optimus  
Panasonic  
0059  
0064  
0245  
0023 0395  
0204  
Samsung  
0323  
Yamaha  
0217  
96  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Useful Remote Control Features  
13  
Receiver control buttons  
Using the remote control unit to control  
other devices  
When a Pioneer receiver is connected to the display, use  
buttons 1 to 3 to operate the receiver.  
When a non-Pioneer receiver is connected to the display, the  
signals for 1 to 3 must first be “learned”. See page 90.  
1
2
RECEIVER (STANDBY/ON)  
Turns the Pioneer receiver power On and Off.  
RECEIVER INPUT  
Selects the input source connected to the Pioneer  
receiver.  
3
RECEIVER VOL +/–  
Adjusts the Pioneer receiver volume level  
Press VOL + to increase the volume and VOL – to decrease  
it.  
NOTE  
• The color-highlighted buttons on the remote control can  
memorize the control signal from another device’s remote  
control.  
1
2
3
Mode switch  
(with “TV”  
selected)  
97  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Useful Remote Control Features  
13  
CBL/SAT control buttons  
When the CBL/SAT function has been preset by the remote  
control’s learning function, the remote control buttons  
function as shown below.  
• When the Mode switch is set to CBL/SAT, the cable  
converter or satellite broadcast tuner connected to the  
display, use the buttons shown below to operate the device  
(3, 4, 5, 8 and 9 for cable converters and 1 to 7 for satellite  
tuners):  
1
6
• Cable converters or satellite broadcast tuners made by other  
manufacturers not listed in the system can be controlled  
using the remote control if buttons 1 to 9 have already  
learned the functions. See page 90.  
2
7
1
2
SAT MENU  
Displays the satellite broadcasting menu screen  
ENTER, / / /  
3
ENTER:  
Activates the selected function  
/ / / : Selects items on the SAT GUIDE screen or  
SAT MENU screen  
8
9
3
0 – 9  
Press a button (or buttons) that corresponds to the  
channel that you want to watch  
4
4
5
6
CH +/–  
Selects a higher or lower channel  
5
SOURCE   
Turns the device sending the image On and Off  
SAT GUIDE  
Displays the satellite broadcasting guide screen  
• Set up this button with the learning function if necessary  
Mode switch  
(with“CBL/SAT”  
selected)  
7
8
9
RETURN  
When the CBL/SAT menu is displayed, restores the  
immediately previous screen  
CH ENTER*  
Enters the selected channel with the direct channel  
selection buttons  
CH RETURN*  
Switches between the current channel and the previous  
channel you were watching  
*
Some cable converter manufacturers do not preset CH  
ENTER and CH RETURN. Set up these buttons with the  
learning function if necessary.  
NOTE  
• CABLE and SAT cannot be selected at the same time.  
• The color-highlighted buttons on the remote control can  
learn the control signal from another device’s remote  
control.  
98  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Useful Remote Control Features  
13  
VCR control buttons  
When the VCR is preset by the remote control’s learning  
function, the remote control buttons function as follows:  
(Mode switch must be set to VCR).  
• Press the input selector button (INPUT 1–6) that matches  
the input terminal connected to the VCR. The VCR can be  
operated using 1 to 8.  
• VCRs made by manufacturers not listed in the system can be  
controlled using the remote control if buttons 1 to 8 have  
learned the functions. See page 90.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CH +/–  
Selects the channel on the VCR  
(PLAY)  
Selects playback  
(RWD)  
Rewinds the tape and allows picture search  
SOURCE   
Turns the power of the VCR On and Off  
(PAUSE/STILL)  
Pauses playback and displays still pictures  
1
2
3
4
5
(FF)  
Rapidly advances the tape and allows picture search  
6
7
8
(REC)  
Starts recording  
(STOP)  
Stops tape transport  
Mode switch  
(with “VCR”  
selected)  
NOTE  
• The color-highlighted buttons on the remote control can  
learn the control signal from another device’s remote  
control.  
99  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Useful Remote Control Features  
13  
1
CH +/– (DVD recorder only)  
Changes the channel of the tuner built into the DVD  
recorder  
2
3
(PLAY)  
Selects playback  
6
7
(SCAN)/(CHAPTER SEARCH)  
Continue pressing to go backward  
Pressing quickly once takes you to the start of the playing  
chapter. Each time it is pressed, playback jumps to the start  
of previous chapter.  
8
9
4
SOURCE   
Turns the power of the DVD player or DVD recorder On and  
Off  
5
6
7
8
(PAUSE/STILL)  
Pauses playback and displays still pictures  
DVD MENU (DVD, DVD recorder)  
Displays the DVD menu  
DVD TOP MENU (DVD, DVD recorder)  
Displays the DVD top menu  
ENTER, / / / (DVD, DVD recorder)  
1
2
ENTER:  
Activates the selected function  
/ / / : Selects items on the DVD MENU screen  
3
4
5
10  
11  
12  
9
RETURN  
When the DVD menu is displayed, restores the  
immediately previous screen  
10 (SCAN)/(CHAPTER SEARCH)  
Continue pressing for fast forward  
Mode switch  
(with “DVD/  
DVR” selected)  
Pressing quickly once takes you to the start of the next  
chapter. Each time it is pressed, playback jumps to the start  
of the next chapter.  
11 (REC) (DVD recorder only)  
Starts recording  
DVD/DVR control buttons  
12 (STOP)  
When the DVD/DVR is preset by the learning function of the  
remote control, the remote control unit buttons will function as  
follows when the Mode switch of the remote control unit is set  
to DVD/DVR.  
Stops playback  
If pressing once fails to stop playback on the DVD player or  
DVD recorder, press twice to open the disc tray.  
11, 12 STOP REC (DVD recorder only)  
Press and hold then press to stop recording. This  
operation applies to Pioneer DVD recorders only.  
• When the input selector button having the same number as  
the input terminal connected to a DVD player or DVD recorder  
is pressed, these players can be operated using  
1
to 12.  
• DVD players or DVD recorders made by other manufacturers  
and not preset can also be operated using the remote control  
unit if 1 to 12 have learned the functions. See page 90.  
NOTE  
• A DVD player and a DVD recorder cannot be selected at the  
same time.  
• The color-highlighted buttons on the remote control can  
learn the control signal from another device’s remote  
control.  
• The remote control buttons can control some LD players. For  
the supported LD players, see the LD brands and codes on  
page 96.  
100  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
14  
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
GENERAL  
• No power  
Possible Solution  
• Is the power cord disconnected? (See page 23)  
• Has POWER been turned on? (See page 24)  
• Check if you pressed TV on the remote control. (See page 24)  
If the indicator on the system lights up red, press TV .  
• Power is suddenly turned off  
• Is the sleep timer set? (See page 55)  
• Check the power control setting. (See page 61)  
• The system’s internal temperature has increased. Clear/clean the vents. (See page 18)  
• A malfunction may have occurred in the home network module.  
• The system cannot be operated  
• External influences such as lightning, static electricity, etc., may cause failures.  
Try turning off the Plasma Display or unplugging the power cord. Wait one to two minutes then restore  
power to the panel.  
• Remote control unit does not operate  
• Check if POWER is Off. Activate the button when the POWER ON and STANDBY indicators are Off.  
• Is the Mode switch set correctly? Slide it to the TV position. (See page 17)  
• Are the batteries inserted with polarity aligned (+, –)? (See page 22)  
• Are the batteries low? (Replace with new batteries.) (See page 22)  
• Point the remote control directly at the panel’s remote control sensor. (See page 22)  
• Is the panel under strong or fluorescent lighting?  
• Is fluorescent light blinding the remote control sensor?  
• POWER ON indicator or STANDBY  
indicator is blinking  
• The unit’s internal protective circuits may have been activated.  
Unplug the panel’s power cord from the power outlet. Wait one to two minutes then plug in the panel again.  
If the problem is not solved with this, contact the nearest Pioneer Authorized Independent Service Company,  
or the Customer Support Division (see back cover).  
PICTURE/SOUND  
• Image and sound are absent  
• Verify that the input source is a TV channel rather than from a PC or a DVD player. (See page 25)  
• Check the Parental Control function. (See page 36)  
Enter a password to temporarily cancel the Parental Control function. (See page 40)  
• Check the cable connection with the antenna. (See page 21)  
• Check the cable connection with the source device. (See pages 66 to 72)  
• No picture  
• Is the connection to other components correct? (See pages 66 to 71)  
• Is a non-compatible PC signal being input? (See page 70)  
• Is picture adjustment correct? (See page 56)  
• Sound but no picture  
• Picture but no sound  
• Check if energy-saving “Picture Off” option is selected. With this option selected, the screen is deactivated;  
only audio is output. To restore the screen display, press any button other than VOL +/– and MUTING. (See  
page 61)  
• Verify that the volume is set high enough to hear. (See page 26)  
• Check if the sound is muted. (See page 26)  
• When using a video or PC input source, verify that the audio terminals are also connected.  
(See pages 66 to 68 and 70)  
• Sound is reversed between the right and • Check if the speaker cable connections have been reversed between the right and left or if the speaker cable  
left speakers  
• Sound but from only one speaker  
from either speaker has been disconnected. (See page 19)  
• Has the balance been correctly adjusted? (See page 60)  
• Picture is cut off  
• Is the image position correct? (See page 62)  
• Has the correct screen size been selected? (See page 64)  
• Colors are too dark/light or appear  
strange  
• Adjust the picture tone. (See page 56)  
• Is the room too bright? The picture may appear dim in a room that is too bright.  
101  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
14  
Problem  
Possible Solution  
OTHER  
• TV-Guide data is unavailable  
• If TV-Guide data cannot be obtained with ANT.A selected for cable connection, select ANT.B for over the air.  
In addition, perform the TV-Guide setup again (see page 31):  
- Select “No” for cable service on Screen 3.  
- Select “Yes” for antenna service on Screen 5.  
- Select “ANT B IN” on Screen 4.  
• An external device connected to the  
USB terminal does not operate  
• Confirm that the device is connected to the display. (See page 74)  
• Disconnect then reconnect the USB cable. (See page 74)  
• Check that the USB cable is shorter than 5 m. (See page 74)  
• Check if the USB cable is properly connected. (See page 74)  
• Turn Off then On the main power to confirm that the USB device is working.  
• Check if the external device works correctly after the USB device was restarted.  
• Verify that the digital camera is set to take a picture.  
• Confirm that the digital camera is placed in Mass Storage mode.  
• To change the digital camera’s configuration, refer to the camera’s instruction manual.  
• Photo data stored in a digital still  
camera cannot be read through USB  
interface  
• Confirm that the device is connected to the display. (See page 74)  
• Verify that the digital camera is turned On.  
• Panel sounds/noises  
• Panel generated sounds, examples: Fan motor noise, Electrical Circuit Humming/Glass Panel buzzing are  
normal operation of a phosphor-based matrix display. Experiment with the available Energy Save modes to  
find the best setting for your use. (See page 61)  
• Screen shows uneven brightness on the • Play content that completely fills the screen until unevenness is minimized. Some signals may require the  
sides  
AV mode setting to be changed. (See page 63)  
Home Media Gallery/NETWORK  
• No servers are found  
• Confirm that the PC is On and not in Standby or Sleep. (nothing is chosen in “Select Servers”). When the PC  
has started with the “Wake On LAN” (WOL), check if the PC complies with WOL or if the WOL setup has  
been properly done on the device manager for BIOS or Windows.  
• Check the physical connections (hub, 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T, or crossed cable and other cable quality when  
cabled directly to a PC). It is strongly recommended to use 100BASE-TX for playback quality and display  
speed.  
• Check the logical connections (IP Address setup, DHCP, etc.). Confirm the IP Address is correct if acquired  
by Auto IP and Firewall setup. Also check if the IP Address is properly acquired with DHCP on the “Network  
Setup” screen that follows the “Setup” menu.  
• Check the PC if its media server (Windows Media Connect or DLNA compliant) is running. Restart if  
necessary. Check if one or more servers are On (this may cause malfunction).  
• Check if the PC is operating properly. Reboot the PC after confirming its specifications and setup.  
• Check the media server setup. If a client is registered manually the setup procedure may have to be run  
again. An option “Not Allowed” may have been selected for connections.  
• Wait for a short period then select “Update to Latest Information” from the Tool Menu. (See page 76)  
• No previously connected server(s) found • Confirm that the PC is On and not in Standby or Sleep. (nothing is chosen in “Select Servers”). When the PC  
(items in “Select Servers” are dimmed)  
has started with the “Wake On LAN” (WOL), check if the PC complies with WOL or if the WOL setup has  
been properly done on the device manager for BIOS or Windows.  
• Check the physical connections (hub, 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T or crossed cable and other cable quality when  
cabled directly to a PC). It is strongly recommended to use 100BASE-TX for playback quality and display  
speed.  
• Check the logical connections (IP Address setup, DHCP, etc.). Confirm the IP Address when acquired by  
Auto IP and Firewall setup. Also check if the IP Address is properly acquired with DHCP on the “Network  
Setup” screen that follows the “Setup” menu.  
• Check the PC if its media server (Windows Media Connect or DLNA compliant) is running. Restart it if  
necessary. Check if one or more servers are On (this may cause malfunction).  
• Check if the PC is operating properly. Reboot the PC after confirming its specifications and setup.  
• Check the media server setup. A setup procedure may be required for connections if a client is registered  
manually. An option “Not Allowed” may have been selected for connections.  
• Wait for a while and select “Update to Latest Information” from the Tool Menu. (See page 76)  
• An available server is selected but  
cannot be navigated  
• Check if the server is correctly set up for file sharing, if the target folder has been deleted, or if one or more  
folders have been corrupted on the server.  
• Check if there are too many files in each folder.  
• A server is arbitrarily selected  
• This arbitrary selection happens when the server you used before had been set to display the top menu  
screen (if you reset it, other servers connected are also reset). When the “Single Server/USB” option is  
selected on the “Auto Connection Setup” screen that follows the “Setup” menu, the server is automatically  
accessed if only one server is connected. Use the Tool Menu to select the proper server. (See page 76)  
• File/folder configuration differs from one • The Media Navigator displays the server contents as classified by the server.  
server to another (strange configuration) • If no information (such as ID3 tag) is contained in the file, files cannot be classified on the server.  
102  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
14  
Problem  
Possible Solution  
Home Media Gallery/PLAYBACK  
• Image or sound is interrupted or  
distorted (Block noise appears)  
• Check the physical connections (hub, 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T, or crossed cable and other cable quality when  
cabled directly to a PC). It is strongly recommended to use 100BASE-TX for playback quality and display  
speed.  
• Check if the PC is operating properly. Reboot the PC after confirming its specifications and setup.  
• Check if the file complies to the supported format, bit rate or profile. Also check if the file is damaged.  
• When connected by a wireless LAN, check if the bit rate is sufficient.  
• Some files that comply with the supported format may not be played back or displayed.  
• Cannot play or display  
• Check the physical connections (hub, 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T, or crossed cable and other cable quality when  
cabled directly to a PC). It is strongly recommended to use 100BASE-TX for playback quality and display  
speed.  
• Check if the PC is operating properly. Reboot the PC after confirming its specifications and setup.  
• Check if the file complies to the supported format, bit rate or profile. Also check if the file is damaged.  
• Check if the leasing contract for the server has expired.  
• When connected by a wireless LAN, check if the bit rate is sufficient.  
• Some files that comply with the supported format may not be played back or displayed.  
• It takes time to capture and display a large-sized image. If this is the case, no operation may be performed.  
• See the Pioneer website (www.pioneerelectronics.com) for the formats that are supported.  
Home Media Gallery/FIRMWARE  
• No updates are possible on USB  
• Check if the device is Mass Storage Class compliant, if it is connected properly, nothing is damaged (power  
unit, mode such as Mass Storage mode and media format, etc.), if it contains the supported files, and if the  
speed of the device is sufficient (poor device speed may result in interrupted or delayed display of images  
due to a bit-rate problem). When using a digital camera that is not Mass Storage Class compliant, insert the  
Flash Memory card into the multi-card reader.  
• Confirm that the device is correctly inserted or removed.  
• Check that the firmware file has been correctly downloaded. Also check the file size.  
• See the Pioneer website (www.pioneerelectronics.com) for details.  
Home Media Gallery/USB  
• USB devices are not properly recognized • Check if the device is Mass Storage Class compliant, if it is connected properly, nothing is damaged (power  
unit, mode such as Mass Storage mode and media format, etc.), if it contains the supported files, and if the  
speed of the device is sufficient (poor device speed may result in interrupted or delayed display of images  
due to a bit-rate problem). When using a digital camera that is not Mass Storage Class compliant, insert the  
Flash Memory card into the multi-card reader.  
• Confirm that the device is correctly inserted or removed.  
• No USB hub is supported. When you connect a home network, connect directly to the device’s USB port.  
• Image or sound is interrupted or  
distorted (Block noise appears)  
• Verify that the file complies with the supported format, bit rate or profile. Also check the file for damage.  
• Some files that comply with the supported format may not play back or display properly.  
• Check if the device is Mass Storage Class compliant, if it is connected properly, nothing is damaged (power  
unit, mode such as Mass Storage mode and media format, etc.), if it contains the supported files, and if the  
speed of the device is sufficient (poor device speed may result in interrupted or delayed display of images  
due to a bit-rate problem). When using a digital camera that is not Mass Storage Class compliant, insert the  
Flash Memory card into the multi-card reader.  
If one of the following error codes appear on screen, check the corresponding message.  
Code  
Message  
Check  
SD04 and Powering off. Internal temperature too high.  
Check if the ambient temperature of the Plasma Display is high.  
SD11  
SD05  
Check temperature around PDP.  
(PRO-1140HD)  
Internal protection circuit turns power off.  
Is there a short in speaker cable?  
(PRO-940HD)  
Check the speaker cable connections between the Plasma Display and the speakers.  
Internal protection circuit turns power off.  
Contact the nearest Pioneer Authorized Independent Service Company or the  
Customer Support Division. (See back cover)  
103  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
14  
This product in part uses “OpenSSL” software.  
To the extent the OpenSSL software is being used, the following notification applies:  
Copyright (c) 1998-2006 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following  
conditions are met:  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer  
in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: “This product  
includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)”  
4. The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this  
software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact [email protected].  
5. Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor may “OpenSSL” appear in their names without prior  
written permission of the OpenSSL Project.  
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: “This product includes software developed  
by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)”  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,  
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY  
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,  
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)  
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING  
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE  
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected]). This product includes software written  
by Tim Hudson ([email protected]).  
Original SSLeay License  
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected])  
All rights reserved.  
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young ([email protected]). The implementation was written so as to  
conform with Netscapes SSL.  
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are ahered to. The following  
conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL  
documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson  
([email protected]).  
Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a  
product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual  
message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following  
conditions are met:  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer  
in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: “This  
product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected])” The word ’cryptographic’ can be left out  
if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-).  
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include  
an acknowledgement: “This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected])”  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT  
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE  
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,  
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE  
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY  
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)  
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code  
cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]  
104  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
14  
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software  
Center Ltd and Clark Cooper  
Copyright (c) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Expat maintainers.  
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT  
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN  
NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,  
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING ROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE  
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.  
“Portions of this software are copyright (c) <year> The FreeType Project (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.” [please replace  
<year> with the value from the FreeType version you actually use]  
If only executable code is distributed, then the accompanying documentation must state that “this software is based in part on the  
work of the Independent JPEG Group”  
COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and LICENSE:  
If you modify libpng you may insert additional notices immediately following this sentence.  
libpng version 1.2.6, September 12, 2004, is Copyright (c) 2004 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and is distributed according to the same  
disclaimer and license as libpng-1.2.5 with the following individual added to the list of Contributing Authors  
Cosmin Truta  
libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through 1.2.5 - October 3, 2002, are Copyright (c) 2000-2002 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are  
distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-1.0.6 with the following individuals added to the list of  
Contributing Authors  
Simon-Pierre Cadieux  
Eric S. Raymond  
Gilles Vollant  
and with the following additions to the disclaimer:  
There is no warranty against interference with your enjoyment of the library or against infringement. There is no warranty that our  
efforts or the library will fulfill any of your particular purposes or needs. This library is provided with all faults, and the entire risk of  
satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy, and effort is with the user.  
libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through 1.0.6, March 20, 2000, are Copyright (c) 1998, 1999 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are  
distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.96, with the following individuals added to the list of  
Contributing Authors:  
Tom Lane  
Glenn Randers-Pehrson  
Willem van Schaik  
libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through 0.96, May 1997, are Copyright (c) 1996, 1997 Andreas Dilger  
Distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.88, with the following individuals added to the list of  
Contributing Authors:  
John Bowler  
Kevin Bracey  
Sam Bushell  
Magnus Holmgren  
Greg Roelofs  
Tom Tanner  
105  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
14  
libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88, January 1996, are Copyright (c) 1995, 1996 Guy Eric Schalnat, Group 42, Inc.  
For the purposes of this copyright and license, “Contributing Authors” is defined as the following set of individuals:  
Andreas Dilger  
Dave Martindale  
Guy Eric Schalnat  
Paul Schmidt  
Tim Wegner  
The PNG Reference Library is supplied “AS IS”. The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. disclaim all warranties, expressed or  
implied, including, without limitation, the warranties of merchantability and of fitness for any purpose. The Contributing Authors  
and Group 42, Inc. assume no liability for direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages, which may  
result from the use of the PNG Reference Library, even if advised of the possibility of such damage.  
Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and distribute this source code, or portions hereof, for any purpose, without  
fee, subject to the following restrictions:  
1. The origin of this source code must not be misrepresented.  
2. Altered versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original source.  
3. This Copyright notice may not be removed or altered from any source or altered source distribution.  
The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. specifically permit, without fee, and encourage the use of this source code as a  
component to supporting the PNG file format in commercial products. If you use this source code in a product, acknowledgment  
is not required but would be appreciated.  
A “png_get_copyright” function is available, for convenient use in “about” boxes and the like: printf (“%s”,png_get_copyright  
(NULL)); Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course) is supplied in the files “pngbar.png” and “pngbar.jpg (88x31) and  
“pngnow.png” (98x31). Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software. OSI Certified Open Source is a certification mark of the  
Open Source Initiative.  
Glenn Randers-Pehrson  
[email protected]  
September 12, 2004  
Copyright (c) 2002, Xiph.org Foundation  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following  
conditions are met:  
- Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.  
- Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in  
the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
- Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products  
derived from this software without specific prior written permission.  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY  
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,  
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)  
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING  
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE  
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
The GIFLIB distribution is Copyright (c) 1997 Eric S. Raymond  
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT  
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN  
NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,  
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE  
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.  
Copyright (c) 1988-1997 Sam Leffler  
106  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
14  
Copyright (c) 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc.  
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS-IS” AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR OTHERWISE,  
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  
IN NO EVENT SHALL SAM LEFFLER OR SILICON GRAPHICS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT OR  
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR  
PROFITS, WHETHER OR NOT ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF DAMAGE, AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, ARISING OUT  
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.  
Copyright (C) 1995-2004 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler  
“Copyright (c) 1998-2003 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.”  
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)”  
Linux Source Notice  
The Pioneer Plasma Television is powered by utilizing the Linux operating system. The machine readable copy of the corresponding  
source code is available for the cost of distribution. To obtain a copy, please visit  
http://www.pioneerelectronics.com/ for more information.  
GNU General Public License  
Version 2, June 1991  
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.  
59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA  
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.  
Preamble  
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public  
License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software-to make sure the software is free for all its users.  
This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation’s software and to any other program whose authors  
commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead.)  
You can apply it to your programs, too.  
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure  
that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source  
code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you  
can do these things.  
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.  
These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.  
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that  
you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they  
know their rights.  
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to  
copy, distribute and/or modify the software.  
Also, for each author’s protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this  
free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not  
the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors’ reputations.  
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free  
program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear  
that any patent must be licensed for everyone’s free use or not licensed at all.  
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.  
GNU General Public License  
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION  
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be  
distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The “Program”, below, refers to any such program or work, and a  
“work based on the Program” means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work  
containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language.  
(Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term “modification”.) Each licensee is addressed as “you”.  
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act  
of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work  
based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the  
Program does.  
107  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
14  
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program’s source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you  
conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact  
all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy  
of this License along with the Program.  
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in  
exchange for a fee.  
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy  
and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these  
conditions:  
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.  
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or  
any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.  
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running for  
such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright  
notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute  
the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License.  
(Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the  
Program is not required to print an announcement.)  
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the  
Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms,  
do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part  
of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose  
permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.  
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is  
to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program.  
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on the  
Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.  
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the  
terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:  
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms  
of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,  
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your cost  
of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be  
distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,  
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is  
allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with  
such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)  
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable work,  
complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus  
the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source code  
distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components  
(compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies  
the executable.  
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent  
access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are  
not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.  
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt  
otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this  
License.  
However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so  
long as such parties remain in full compliance.  
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify  
or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore,  
by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to  
do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it.  
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from  
the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any  
further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance  
by third parties to this License.  
108  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
14  
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent  
issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this  
License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your  
obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program  
at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies  
directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from  
distribution of the Program.  
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is  
intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.  
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of  
any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is  
implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software  
distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he  
or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.  
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.  
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the  
original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation  
excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this  
License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.  
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such  
new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.  
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies  
to it and “any later version”, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later  
version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may  
choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.  
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to  
the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software  
Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status  
of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.  
NO WARRANTY  
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT  
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR  
OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,  
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE  
PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.  
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR  
ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU  
FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE  
USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED  
INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH  
ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH  
DAMAGES.  
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS  
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs  
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to  
make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.  
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively  
convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is  
found.  
<one line to give the program’s name and an idea of what it does.>  
Copyright (C) yyyy name of author  
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as  
published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.  
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of  
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details.  
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software  
Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.  
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.  
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:  
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author  
109  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
14  
Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type ‘show w’. This is free software, and you are welcome  
to redistribute it under certain conditions; type ’show c’ for details.  
The hypothetical commands ’show w’ and ’show c’ should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course,  
the commands you use may be called something other than ’show w’ and ’show c’; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu  
items-whatever suits your program.  
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the  
program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:  
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program ’Gnomovision’ (which makes passes at compilers) written  
by James Hacker.  
signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1989  
Ty Coon, President of Vice  
This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine  
library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do,  
use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License.  
GNU Lesser General Public License  
Version 2.1, February 1999  
Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.  
59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA  
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.  
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2,  
hence the version number 2.1.]  
Preamble  
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public  
Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software-to make sure the software is free for all its  
users. This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software packages-typically libraries-  
of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully  
about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the  
explanations below.  
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make  
sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source  
code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are  
informed that you can do these things.  
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these  
rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it.  
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we  
gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link other code with the library, you must  
provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and  
recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.  
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal  
permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.  
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the library is modified  
by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version, so that the original  
author’s reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others.  
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to make sure that a company cannot  
effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder.  
Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use  
specified in this license.  
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License. This license, the GNU Lesser  
General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We  
use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-free programs.  
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the combination of the two is legally speaking  
a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the  
entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code  
with the library.  
We call this license the “Lesser” General Public License because it does Less to protect the user’s freedom than the ordinary  
General Public License. It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs.  
These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries. However, the Lesser license  
provides advantages in certain special circumstances.  
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library, so that it  
becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the library.  
110  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
14  
A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by  
limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License.  
In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body  
of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many more people to use the  
whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system.  
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users’ freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that  
is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library.  
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between  
a “work based on the library” and a “work that uses the library”. The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the  
latter must be combined with the library in order to run.  
GNU Lesser General Public License  
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION  
0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder  
or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also called “this  
License”). Each licensee is addressed as “you”.  
A “library” means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application  
programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.  
The “Library”, below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms. A “work based  
on the Library” means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library  
or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter,  
translation is included without limitation in the term “modification”.)  
”Source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a library, complete source  
code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used  
to control compilation and installation of the library.  
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act  
of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents  
constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true  
depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does.  
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library’s complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided  
that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty;  
keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License  
along with the Library.  
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in  
exchange for a fee.  
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and  
distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:  
a) The modified work must itself be a software library.  
b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.  
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.  
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses  
the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure  
that, in the event an application does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever  
part of its purpose remains meaningful.  
(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the  
application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must be  
optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square roots.) These requirements  
apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library, and can be  
reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those  
sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is  
a work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other  
licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.  
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is  
to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library.  
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on the Library)  
on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.  
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library.  
To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License,  
version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has  
appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in these notices.  
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies  
to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy. This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code  
of the Library into a program that is not a library.  
111  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
14  
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under  
the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source  
code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software  
interchange.  
If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to  
copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties  
are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.  
5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled  
or linked with it, is called a “work that uses the Library”. Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and  
therefore falls outside the scope of this License. However, linking a “work that uses the Library” with the Library creates an  
executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a “work that uses the  
library”. The executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.  
When a “work that uses the Library” uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may  
be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work  
can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.  
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline  
functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative  
work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.)  
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section  
6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.  
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a “work that uses the Library” with the Library to produce  
a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit  
modification of the work for the customer’s own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications.  
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are  
covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you  
must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this  
License.  
Also, you must do one of these things:  
a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever  
changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable  
linked with the Library, with the complete machine-readable “work that uses the Library”, as object code and/or source  
code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified  
Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be  
able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions.)  
b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time  
a copy of the library already present on the user’s computer system, rather than copying library functions into the  
executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the  
modified version is interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with.  
c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the materials specified in  
Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution.  
d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the  
above specified materials from the same place.  
e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy.  
For an executable, the required form of the “work that uses the Library” must include any data and utility programs needed for  
reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything  
that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the  
operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.  
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally  
accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an  
executable that you distribute.  
7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library  
facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the work  
based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things:  
a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with any other library  
facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above.  
b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining  
where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work.  
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any  
attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your  
rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their  
licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.  
9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify  
or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore,  
by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do  
so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it.  
112  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
14  
10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from  
the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions. You may not  
impose any further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing  
compliance by third parties with this License.  
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent  
issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this  
License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your  
obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library  
at all.  
For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly  
or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from  
distribution of the Library.  
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is  
intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.  
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of  
any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is  
implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software  
distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he  
or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.  
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.  
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the  
original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation  
excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this  
License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.  
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time.  
Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.  
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies  
to it and “any later version”, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later  
version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version number, you may choose  
any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.  
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with  
these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to  
the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of  
preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.  
NO WARRANTY  
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT  
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR  
OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,  
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE  
LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.  
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR  
ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU  
FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE  
USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED  
INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY  
OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH  
DAMAGES.  
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS  
113  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
14  
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries  
If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we recommend making it free software  
that everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively, under  
the terms of the ordinary General Public License).  
To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most  
effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full  
notice is found.  
<one line to give the library’s name and an idea of what it does.>  
Copyright (C) year name of author  
This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as  
published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.  
This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of  
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General Public License for more details.  
You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with this library; if not, write to the Free Software  
Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA  
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.  
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the  
library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:  
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library ’Frob’ (a library for tweaking knobs) written by James Random  
Hacker.  
signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1990  
Ty Coon, President of Vice  
That’s all there is to it!  
114  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
14  
Specifications  
50" Plasma Display  
Model: PRO-1140HD  
42" Plasma Display  
Model: PRO-940HD  
Item  
Number of pixels  
Audio Amplifier  
Speakers  
1365 × 768 pixels  
1024 × 768 pixels  
13 W + 13 W (1 kHz, 10 %, 8 Ω)  
13 W + 13 W (1 kHz, 10 %, 8 Ω)  
—
Woofer: 4.8 cm x 13 cm cone type  
Tweeter: 2.5 cm semidome type  
Surround System  
Power Requirement  
Weight  
SRS/FOCUS/TruBass  
SRS/FOCUS/TruBass  
120 V AC, 60 Hz, 355 W (26 W Standby)  
Main unit: 34.3 kg (75.7 lbs.)  
120 V AC, 60 Hz, 312 W (26 W Standby)  
Main unit: 29.2 kg (64.4 lbs.)  
Stand: 2.5 kg (5.5 lbs.) (including bolts)  
Total: 31.7 kg (69.9 lbs.)  
Reception System (Digital)  
Circuit type  
ATSC Digital TV system  
8VSB/64QAM/256QAM/QPSK demodulation  
VHF Ch. 2 to 13 UHF Ch. 14 to 69  
Ch. 2 to 135  
Tuner  
VHF/UHF  
CATV  
Audio  
Dolby Digital  
format  
Reception System (Analog)  
Circuit type  
American TV standard NTSC system  
Video signal detection PLL full synchronous detection, PLL digital Synthesizer system  
Tuner  
VHF/UHF  
CATV  
VHF Ch. 2 to 13 UHF Ch. 14 to 69  
ANT/CABLE A IN Ch. 1 to 135 ANT B IN Ch. 1 to 125  
Audio multiplex  
Terminals Rear ANT/CABLE A IN  
BTSC system  
75 Ω UNBAL, F Type for DTV/VHF/UHF/CATV in  
ANT B IN  
75 Ω UNBAL, F Type for VHF/UHF/CATV in Loop out  
INPUT 1  
S-VIDEO in, VIDEO in, AUDIO in  
INPUT 2  
COMPONENT VIDEO in, S-VIDEO in, VIDEO in, AUDIO in  
INPUT 3  
COMPONENT VIDEO in, AUDIO in  
PC  
Analog RGB in, AUDIO in  
INPUT 5  
HDMI in*, AUDIO in  
INPUT 6  
HDMI in*, AUDIO in  
MONITOR OUT  
Digital Audio Output  
G-LINK  
VIDEO out, AUDIO out  
Optical  
1
1
1
1
ETHERNET  
CONTROL IN  
CONTROL OUT  
SPEAKER  
SUB WOOFER OUTPUT  
CableCARD  
INPUT 4  
8 Ω to 16 Ω  
–
Variable  
Point of Deployment  
COMPONENT VIDEO in, VIDEO in, AUDIO in  
USB in**  
Side  
USB  
On-screen display languages  
English/French/Spanish  
*
This conforms to HDMI1.1 and HDCP1.1.  
HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) is a digital interface that sends both video and audio signals through a single  
cable.  
HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) is a technology used to protect copyrighted digital content that use Digital  
Visual Interface (DVI).  
** This conforms to USB 1.1 and 2.0 specifications.  
• Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.  
115  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
14  
Dimensions  
PRO-1140HD  
Unit: mm (inch)  
115  
(4-1/2)  
1224 (48-3/16)  
717  
(28-1/4)  
PRO-940HD  
Unit: mm (inch)  
115  
(4-1/2)  
1040 (40-15/16)  
679  
(26-3/4)  
719  
(28-5/16)  
273  
559 (22)  
(10-3/4)  
116  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
14  
Trademarks  
• In the United States, TV GUIDE and other related marks are registered trademarks of Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/  
or one of its affiliates. In Canada, TV GUIDE is a registered mark of Transcontinental, Inc. and is used under license by Gemstar-  
TV Guide International, Inc.  
®
• FOCUS, WOW, SRS and h symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc.  
FOCUS and WOW technologies are incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc.  
• Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  
• HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.  
®
• This product includes FontAvenue fonts licensed by NEC Corporation. FontAvenue is a registered trademark of NEC  
Corporation.  
• DDC is a registered trademark of Video Electronics Standards Association.  
• CableCARD is a trademark of Cable Television Laboratories, Inc.  
• This software is based in part on the work of the independent JPEG Group.  
• The names of the companies or institutions are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective companies or institutions.  
• The PlaysForSure logo, Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation  
in the United States and/or other countries.  
• DLNA and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks and/or service marks of Digital Living Network Alliance.  
License  
• The TV Guide On Screen system is manufactured under license from Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or one of its  
affiliates.  
• Content owners use Windows Media digital rights management technology (WMDRM) to protect their intellectual property,  
including copyrights. This device uses WMDRM software to access WMDRM-protected content. If the WMDRM software fails  
to protect the content, content owners may ask Microsoft to revoke the software’s ability to use WMDRM to play or copy  
protected content. Revocation does not affect unprotected content. When you download licenses for protected content, you  
agree that Microsoft may include a revocation list with the licenses. Content owners may require you to upgrade WMDRM to  
access their content. If you decline an upgrade, you will not be able to access content that requires the upgrade.  
• This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft. Use or distribution of such technology outside of  
this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft.  
• The DLNA logo is permitted to the product that has obtained a DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance) certificate.  
Patent  
• The TV Guide On Screen system is protected by one or more of the following United States patents 4,908,713; 6,498,895;  
6,850,693; 6,396,546; 5,940,073; 6,239,794 to Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or its subsidiaries.  
Disclaimer Notice  
• Gemstar-TV Guide International Inc. and/or its related affiliates are not in any way liable for the accuracy or availability of the  
program schedule information or other data in the TV Guide On Screen system and cannot guarantee service availability in your  
area. In no event shall Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or its related affiliates be liable for any damages in connection  
with the accuracy or availability of the program schedule information or other data in the TV Guide On Screen system.  
Copyright protection  
• This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights.  
Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other  
limited consumer uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.  
Important Notice about software upgrade from Pioneer  
Attention Pioneer PDP Owners:  
Thank you for purchasing a Pioneer Digital Cable Ready (DCR) compatible Plasma TV.  
You have purchased the most advanced product of its kind available today.  
However, as technology advances, DCR systems may continue to evolve. To maintain compatibility with DCR systems and features,  
your Plasma TV may benefit from, or require software upgrades.  
As part of our commitment to our customers, Pioneer will send you upgrade software and instructions as needed to keep your  
DCR compatible Plasma TV up to date with this technology.  
Please take the time to register your DCR compatible Plasma TV at  
www.pioneerelectronics.com  
This registration enables us to keep you up to date on changes that may occur.  
Thank you very much.  
Note:  
DCR function works only in the USA.  
DCR is unavailable in Canada.  
Software update for the Home Media Gallery  
You can also update the software for the Home Media Gallery at the Pioneer website above. For details, see page 87.  
Published by Pioneer Corporation.  
Copyright © 2006 Pioneer Corporation.  
All rights reserved.  
117  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Published by Pioneer Corporation.  
Copyright © 2006 Pioneer Corporation.  
All rights reserved.  
PIONEER CORPORATION  
4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.  
P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90810-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.  
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901  
PIONEER EUROPE NV  
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.  
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.  
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.  
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270  
Printed in China <ARB1568-A>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Pelican Home Safety Product StealthLite2400 User Manual
Pelican Wireless Office Headset 2670 User Manual
Philips Iron GC4311 User Manual
Philips Telephone US2 P70051 User Manual
Philips TV Cables SWA2107NB User Manual
Philips TV Cables SWA2552 User Manual
Philips TV Converter Box TU CT20 User Manual
Planet Technology Network Router PL 501 EU US UK User Manual
Professional Series Burner PS77311 User Manual
PVI Industries Water Heater 1500P1250A TPGO User Manual